Installer reference guide
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
+
ERHQ011-014-016BA
ERLQ011-014-016CA
EHBH/X11+16CB
Installer reference guide
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
English
Table of contents
6.2
Table of contents
1 General safety precautions
1.1
1.2
About the documentation ..........................................................
1.1.1
Meaning of warnings and symbols..............................
For the installer..........................................................................
1.2.1
General .......................................................................
1.2.2
Installation site ............................................................
1.2.3
Refrigerant ..................................................................
1.2.4
Brine............................................................................
1.2.5
Water ..........................................................................
1.2.6
Electrical .....................................................................
2 About the documentation
2.1
2.2
About this document..................................................................
Installer reference guide at a glance .........................................
3 About the box
3.1
3.2
3.3
Overview: About the box ...........................................................
Outdoor unit...............................................................................
3.2.1
To unpack the outdoor unit .........................................
3.2.2
To handle the outdoor unit ..........................................
3.2.3
To remove the accessories from the outdoor unit.......
Indoor unit .................................................................................
3.3.1
To unpack the indoor unit ...........................................
3.3.2
To remove the accessories from the indoor unit.........
4 About the units and options
4.1
4.2
4.3
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
Overview: Application guidelines...............................................
Setting up the space heating/cooling system ............................
5.2.1
Single room.................................................................
5.2.2
Multiple rooms – One LWT zone ................................
5.2.3
Multiple rooms – Two LWT zones...............................
Setting up an auxiliary heat source for space heating...............
Setting up the domestic hot water tank .....................................
5.4.1
System layout – Integrated DHW tank........................
5.4.2
System layout – Standalone DHW tank......................
5.4.3
Selecting the volume and desired temperature for
the DHW tank..............................................................
5.4.4
Setup and configuration – DHW tank..........................
5.4.5
Combination: Standalone DHW tank + Solar panels ..
5.4.6
DHW pump for instant hot water.................................
5.4.7
DHW pump for disinfection .........................................
Setting up the energy metering .................................................
5.5.1
Produced heat.............................................................
5.5.2
Consumed energy.......................................................
5.5.3
Normal kWh rate power supply...................................
5.5.4
Preferential kWh rate power supply ............................
Setting up the power consumption control ................................
5.6.1
Permanent power limitation ........................................
5.6.2
Power limitation activated by digital inputs .................
5.6.3
Power limitation process .............................................
Setting up an external temperature sensor ...............................
6 Preparation
6.1
6
6.3
6.4
6.5
6
7
7
7
7
7
7
8
8
8
8
9
11
7 Installation
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
11
11
11
13
15
16
18
18
18
18
19
19
19
19
20
20
20
20
21
21
21
22
22
23
23
Overview: Preparation............................................................... 23
Installer reference guide
2
3
3
4
4
4
4
5
5
6
Overview: About the units and options......................................
9
Identification ..............................................................................
9
4.2.1
Identification label: Outdoor unit ................................. 9
4.2.2
Identification label: Indoor unit .................................... 9
Combining units and options .....................................................
9
4.3.1
Possible options for the outdoor unit........................... 9
4.3.2
Possible options for the indoor unit............................. 10
4.3.3
Possible combinations of indoor unit and outdoor
unit .............................................................................. 11
4.3.4
Possible combinations of indoor unit and domestic
hot water tank ............................................................. 11
5 Application guidelines
5.1
5.2
3
Preparing installation site ...........................................................
6.2.1
Installation site requirements of the outdoor unit .........
6.2.2
Additional installation site requirements of the
outdoor unit in cold climates ........................................
6.2.3
Installation site requirements of the indoor unit ...........
Preparing refrigerant piping........................................................
6.3.1
Refrigerant piping requirements...................................
6.3.2
Refrigerant piping insulation ........................................
Preparing water piping ...............................................................
6.4.1
Water circuit requirements ...........................................
6.4.2
Formula to calculate the expansion vessel prepressure .......................................................................
6.4.3
To check the water volume and flow rate ....................
6.4.4
Changing the pre-pressure of the expansion vessel....
6.4.5
To check the water volume: Examples ........................
Preparing electrical wiring ..........................................................
6.5.1
About preparing electrical wiring..................................
6.5.2
About preferential kWh rate power supply ...................
6.5.3
Overview of electrical connections except external
actuators ......................................................................
6.5.4
Overview of electrical connections for external and
internal actuators .........................................................
7.6
7.7
7.8
23
23
24
24
25
25
25
25
25
26
26
27
28
28
28
28
29
29
30
Overview: Installation .................................................................
Opening the units .......................................................................
7.2.1
About opening the units ...............................................
7.2.2
To open the outdoor unit..............................................
7.2.3
To open the indoor unit ................................................
7.2.4
To open the switch box cover of the indoor unit ..........
Mounting the outdoor unit...........................................................
7.3.1
About mounting the outdoor unit..................................
7.3.2
Precautions when mounting the outdoor unit...............
7.3.3
To provide the installation structure .............................
7.3.4
To install the outdoor unit.............................................
7.3.5
To provide drainage .....................................................
7.3.6
To prevent the outdoor unit from falling over ...............
Mounting the indoor unit.............................................................
7.4.1
About mounting the indoor unit ....................................
7.4.2
Precautions when mounting the indoor unit.................
7.4.3
To install the indoor unit...............................................
7.4.4
To install the drain pan kit ............................................
Connecting the refrigerant piping ...............................................
7.5.1
About connecting the refrigerant piping .......................
7.5.2
Precautions when connecting the refrigerant piping ....
7.5.3
Guidelines when connecting the refrigerant piping ......
7.5.4
Pipe bending guidelines...............................................
7.5.5
To flare the pipe end ....................................................
7.5.6
To braze the pipe end ..................................................
7.5.7
Using the stop valve and service port ..........................
7.5.8
To connect the refrigerant piping to the outdoor unit ...
7.5.9
To connect the refrigerant piping to the indoor unit .....
7.5.10 To determine if oil traps are required ...........................
Checking the refrigerant piping ..................................................
7.6.1
About checking the refrigerant piping ..........................
7.6.2
Precautions when checking the refrigerant piping .......
7.6.3
Checking refrigerant piping: Setup...............................
7.6.4
To check for leaks........................................................
7.6.5
To perform vacuum drying ...........................................
Charging refrigerant ...................................................................
7.7.1
About charging refrigerant ...........................................
7.7.2
Precautions when charging refrigerant ........................
7.7.3
To determine the additional refrigerant amount ...........
7.7.4
To determine the complete recharge amount ..............
7.7.5
Charging refrigerant: Setup..........................................
7.7.6
To charge additional refrigerant ...................................
7.7.7
To fix the fluorinated greenhouse gases label .............
Connecting the water piping.......................................................
7.8.1
About connecting the water piping...............................
7.8.2
Precautions when connecting the water piping............
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
30
31
31
31
31
32
32
32
32
32
33
33
33
33
34
34
34
34
35
35
36
36
37
37
37
37
37
37
38
38
38
38
38
38
38
39
39
39
39
ERHQ+ERLQ011~016 + EHBH/X11+16CB
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P384974-1B – 2017.04
1 General safety precautions
7.9
7.10
7.11
7.8.3
To connect the water piping........................................
7.8.4
To fill the water circuit .................................................
7.8.5
To fill the domestic hot water tank ..............................
7.8.6
To insulate the water piping ........................................
Connecting the electrical wiring.................................................
7.9.1
About connecting the electrical wiring.........................
7.9.2
About electrical compliance ........................................
7.9.3
Precautions when connecting the electrical wiring .....
7.9.4
Guidelines when connecting the electrical wiring .......
7.9.5
Specifications of standard wiring components............
7.9.6
To connect the electrical wiring on the outdoor unit....
7.9.7
To reposition the air thermistor on the outdoor unit ....
7.9.8
To connect the electrical wiring on the indoor unit......
7.9.9
To connect the main power supply .............................
7.9.10 To connect the backup heater power supply ..............
7.9.11 To connect the user interface .....................................
7.9.12 To connect the shut-off valve......................................
7.9.13 To connect the electrical meters .................................
7.9.14 To connect the domestic hot water pump ...................
7.9.15 To connect the alarm output .......................................
7.9.16 To connect the space cooling/heating ON/OFF
output ..........................................................................
7.9.17 To connect the changeover to external heat source...
7.9.18 To connect the power consumption digital inputs .......
7.9.19 To connect the safety thermostat (normal closed
contact) .......................................................................
Finishing the outdoor unit installation ........................................
7.10.1 To finish the outdoor unit installation ..........................
7.10.2 To close the outdoor unit ............................................
Finishing the indoor unit installation ..........................................
7.11.1 To fix the user interface cover to the indoor unit.........
7.11.2 To close the indoor unit...............................................
8 Configuration
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4
8.5
Overview: Configuration ............................................................
8.1.1
To connect the PC cable to the switch box.................
8.1.2
To access the most used commands .........................
8.1.3
To copy the system settings from the first to the
second user interface..................................................
8.1.4
To copy the language set from the first to the second
user interface ..............................................................
8.1.5
Quick wizard: Set the system layout after first power
ON...............................................................................
Basic configuration ....................................................................
8.2.1
Quick wizard: Language / time and date.....................
8.2.2
Quick wizard: Standard...............................................
8.2.3
Quick wizard: Options .................................................
8.2.4
Quick wizard: Capacities (energy metering) ...............
8.2.5
Space heating/cooling control.....................................
8.2.6
Domestic hot water control .........................................
8.2.7
Contact/helpdesk number ...........................................
Advanced configuration/optimization.........................................
8.3.1
Space heating/cooling operation: advanced ...............
8.3.2
Domestic hot water control: advanced........................
8.3.3
Heat source settings ...................................................
8.3.4
System settings...........................................................
Menu structure: Overview user settings ....................................
Menu structure: Overview installer settings...............................
9 Commissioning
9.1
9.2
9.3
9.4
Overview: Commissioning.........................................................
Precautions when commissioning .............................................
Checklist before commissioning................................................
Checklist during commissioning ................................................
9.4.1
To check the minimum flow rate .................................
9.4.2
Air purge function........................................................
9.4.3
To perform a test run ..................................................
9.4.4
To perform an actuator test run ..................................
9.4.5
Underfloor heating screed dryout................................
10 Hand-over to the user
ERHQ+ERLQ011~016 + EHBH/X11+16CB
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P384974-1B – 2017.04
39
39
40
40
40
40
40
41
41
41
41
42
43
44
44
45
46
46
47
47
11 Maintenance and service
11.1
11.2
11.3
11.4
12 Troubleshooting
12.1
12.2
12.3
47
47
47
47
48
48
48
48
48
48
49
12.4
13.1
13.2
13.3
50
50
77
77
77
77
77
78
78
79
79
79
82
82
82
82
82
83
83
83
83
83
84
84
84
84
84
86
Overview: Disposal..................................................................... 86
About pump down ...................................................................... 86
To pump down............................................................................ 86
14 Technical data
14.1
14.2
14.3
14.4
14.5
14.6
14.7
81
81
81
81
81
Overview: Troubleshooting.........................................................
Precautions when troubleshooting .............................................
Solving problems based on symptoms.......................................
12.3.1 Symptom: The unit is NOT heating or cooling as
expected ......................................................................
12.3.2 Symptom: The compressor does NOT start (space
heating or domestic water heating)..............................
12.3.3 Symptom: The pump is making noise (cavitation) .......
12.3.4 Symptom: The pressure relief valve opens..................
12.3.5 Symptom: The water pressure relief valve leaks .........
12.3.6 Symptom: The space is NOT sufficiently heated at
low outdoor temperatures ............................................
12.3.7 Symptom: The pressure at the tapping point is
temporarily unusually high ...........................................
12.3.8 Symptom: Decoration panels are pushed away due
to a swollen tank ..........................................................
12.3.9 Symptom: Tank disinfection function is NOT
completed correctly (AH-error).....................................
Solving problems based on error codes.....................................
12.4.1 Error codes: Overview .................................................
13 Disposal
49
49
49
50
51
51
51
53
55
56
59
59
59
59
64
68
71
75
76
81
Overview: Maintenance and service ..........................................
Maintenance safety precautions.................................................
11.2.1 Opening the indoor unit................................................
Checklist for yearly maintenance of the outdoor unit .................
Checklist for yearly maintenance of the indoor unit....................
87
Service space: Outdoor unit .......................................................
Piping diagram: Outdoor unit......................................................
Piping diagram: Indoor unit ........................................................
Wiring diagram: Outdoor unit .....................................................
Wiring diagram: Indoor unit ........................................................
Drain pan necessity....................................................................
ESP curve: Indoor unit ...............................................................
87
88
90
91
92
95
96
15 Glossary
96
16 Field settings table
97
1
General safety precautions
1.1
About the documentation
▪ The original documentation is written in English. All other
languages are translations.
▪ The precautions described in this document cover very important
topics, follow them carefully.
▪ The installation of the system, and all activities described in the
installation manual and the installer reference guide must be
performed by an authorized installer.
1.1.1
Meaning of warnings and symbols
DANGER
Indicates a situation that results in death or serious injury.
DANGER: RISK OF ELECTROCUTION
Indicates a situation that could result in electrocution.
81
Installer reference guide
3
1 General safety precautions
DANGER: RISK OF BURNING
DANGER: RISK OF BURNING
Indicates a situation that could result in burning because of
extreme hot or cold temperatures.
▪ Do NOT touch the refrigerant piping, water piping or
internal parts during and immediately after operation. It
could be too hot or too cold. Give it time to return to
normal temperature. If you must touch it, wear
protective gloves.
DANGER: RISK OF EXPLOSION
Indicates a situation that could result in explosion.
▪ Do NOT touch any accidental leaking refrigerant.
WARNING
WARNING
Indicates a situation that could result in death or serious
injury.
Provide adequate measures to prevent that the unit can be
used as a shelter by small animals. Small animals that
make contact with electrical parts can cause malfunctions,
smoke or fire.
WARNING: FLAMMABLE MATERIAL
CAUTION
CAUTION
Indicates a situation that could result in minor or moderate
injury.
Do NOT touch the air inlet or aluminium fins of the unit.
NOTICE
NOTICE
▪ Do NOT place any objects or equipment on top of the
unit.
Indicates a situation that could result in equipment or
property damage.
▪ Do NOT sit, climb or stand on the unit.
INFORMATION
NOTICE
Indicates useful tips or additional information.
Symbol
Works executed on the outdoor unit are best done under
dry weather conditions to avoid water ingress.
Explanation
Before installation, read the installation and
operation manual, and the wiring instruction sheet.
Before performing maintenance and service tasks,
read the service manual.
For more information, see the installer and user
reference guide.
In accordance with the applicable legislation, it might be necessary
to provide a logbook with the product containing at least: information
on maintenance, repair work, results of tests, stand-by periods,…
Also, at least, following information must be provided at an
accessible place at the product:
▪ Instructions for shutting down the system in case of an emergency
▪ Name and address of fire department, police and hospital
1.2
For the installer
▪ Name, address and day and night telephone numbers for
obtaining service
1.2.1
General
In Europe, EN378 provides the necessary guidance for this logbook.
If you are not sure how to install or operate the unit, contact your
dealer.
NOTICE
Improper installation or attachment of equipment or
accessories could result in electric shock, short-circuit,
leaks, fire or other damage to the equipment. Only use
accessories, optional equipment and spare parts made or
approved by Daikin.
WARNING
Make sure installation, testing and applied materials
comply with applicable legislation (on top of the
instructions described in the Daikin documentation).
CAUTION
Wear adequate personal protective equipment (protective
gloves, safety glasses,…) when installing, maintaining or
servicing the system.
1.2.2
Installation site
▪ Provide sufficient space around the unit for servicing and air
circulation.
▪ Make sure the installation site withstands the unit's weight and
vibration.
▪ Make sure the area is well ventilated. Do NOT block any
ventilation openings.
▪ Make sure the unit is level.
Do NOT install the unit in the following places:
▪ In potentially explosive atmospheres.
▪ In places where there is machinery that emits electromagnetic
waves. Electromagnetic waves may disturb the control system,
and cause malfunction of the equipment.
WARNING
▪ In places where there is a risk of fire due to the leakage of
flammable gases (example: thinner or gasoline), carbon fibre,
ignitable dust.
Tear apart and throw away plastic packaging bags so that
nobody, especially children, can play with them. Possible
risk: suffocation.
▪ In places where corrosive gas (example: sulphurous acid gas) is
produced. Corrosion of copper pipes or soldered parts may cause
the refrigerant to leak.
1.2.3
Refrigerant
If applicable. See the installation manual or installer reference guide
of your application for more information.
Installer reference guide
4
ERHQ+ERLQ011~016 + EHBH/X11+16CB
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P384974-1B – 2017.04
1 General safety precautions
If
NOTICE
Make sure refrigerant piping installation complies with
applicable legislation. In Europe, EN378 is the applicable
standard.
A siphon tube is present
Then
Charge with the cylinder upright.
(i.e., the cylinder is marked with
"Liquid filling siphon attached")
NOTICE
Make sure the field piping and connections are not
subjected to stress.
A siphon tube is NOT present
WARNING
Charge with the cylinder upside
down.
During tests, NEVER pressurize the product with a
pressure higher than the maximum allowable pressure (as
indicated on the nameplate of the unit).
WARNING
Take sufficient precautions in case of refrigerant leakage. If
refrigerant gas leaks, ventilate the area immediately.
Possible risks:
▪ Open refrigerant cylinders slowly.
▪ Charge the refrigerant in liquid form. Adding it in gas form may
prevent normal operation.
▪ Excessive refrigerant concentrations in a closed room
can lead to oxygen deficiency.
CAUTION
When the refrigerant charging procedure is done or when
pausing, close the valve of the refrigerant tank
immediately. If the valve is not closed immediately,
remaining pressure might charge additional refrigerant.
Possible consequence: Incorrect refrigerant amount.
▪ Toxic gas may be produced if refrigerant gas comes
into contact with fire.
DANGER: RISK OF EXPLOSION
Pump down – Refrigerant leakage. If you want to pump
down the system, and there is a leakage in the refrigerant
circuit:
▪ Do NOT use the unit's automatic pump down function,
with which you can collect all refrigerant from the
system into the outdoor unit. Possible consequence:
Self-combustion and explosion of the compressor
because of air going into the operating compressor.
1.2.4
Brine
If applicable. See the installation manual or installer reference guide
of your application for more information.
WARNING
The selection of the brine MUST be in accordance with the
applicable legislation.
▪ Use a separate recovery system so that the unit's
compressor does NOT have to operate.
WARNING
Take sufficient precautions in case of brine leakage. If
brine leaks, ventilate the area immediately and contact
your local dealer.
WARNING
Always recover the refrigerant. Do NOT release them
directly into the environment. Use a vacuum pump to
evacuate the installation.
WARNING
After all the piping has been connected, make sure there is
no gas leak. Use nitrogen to perform a gas leak detection.
The ambient temperature inside the unit can get much
higher than that of the room, e.g. 70°C. In case of a brine
leak, hot parts inside the unit can create a hazardous
situation.
NOTICE
WARNING
NOTICE
▪ To avoid compressor breakdown, do NOT charge more
than the specified amount of refrigerant.
▪ When the refrigerant system is to be opened,
refrigerant must be treated according to the applicable
legislation.
WARNING
Make sure there is no oxygen in the system. Refrigerant
may only be charged after performing the leak test and the
vacuum drying.
▪ In case re-charge is required, refer to the nameplate of the unit. It
states the type of refrigerant and necessary amount.
The use and installation of the application MUST comply
with the safety and environmental precautions specified in
the applicable legislation.
1.2.5
Water
If applicable. See the installation manual or installer reference guide
of your application for more information.
NOTICE
Make sure water quality complies with EU directive
98/83 EC.
▪ The unit is factory charged with refrigerant and depending on pipe
sizes and pipe lengths some systems require additional charging
of refrigerant.
▪ Only use tools exclusively for the refrigerant type used in the
system, this to ensure pressure resistance and prevent foreign
materials from entering into the system.
▪ Charge the liquid refrigerant as follows:
ERHQ+ERLQ011~016 + EHBH/X11+16CB
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P384974-1B – 2017.04
Installer reference guide
5
2 About the documentation
1.2.6
Electrical
NOTICE
Precautions when laying power wiring:
DANGER: RISK OF ELECTROCUTION
▪ Do not connect wiring of different thicknesses to the
power terminal block (slack in the power wiring may
cause abnormal heat).
▪ Turn OFF all power supply before removing the
switch box cover, connecting electrical wiring or
touching electrical parts.
▪ When connecting wiring which is the same thickness,
do as shown in the figure below.
▪ Disconnect the power supply for more than 1 minute,
and measure the voltage at the terminals of main circuit
capacitors or electrical components before servicing.
The voltage MUST be less than 50 V DC before you
can touch electrical components. For the location of the
terminals, see the wiring diagram.
▪ Do NOT touch electrical components with wet hands.
▪ For wiring, use the designated power wire and connect
firmly, then secure to prevent outside pressure being
exerted on the terminal board.
▪ Do NOT leave the unit unattended when the service
cover is removed.
▪ Use an appropriate screwdriver for tightening the
terminal screws. A screwdriver with a small head will
damage the head and make proper tightening
impossible.
WARNING
If NOT factory installed, a main switch or other means for
disconnection, having a contact separation in all poles
providing full disconnection under overvoltage category III
condition, MUST be installed in the fixed wiring.
WARNING
▪ ONLY use copper wires.
▪ Over-tightening the terminal screws may break them.
Install power cables at least 1 metre away from televisions or radios
to prevent interference. Depending on the radio waves, a distance of
1 metre may not be sufficient.
▪ Make sure the field wiring complies with the applicable
legislation.
WARNING
▪ After finishing the electrical work, confirm that each
electrical component and terminal inside the electrical
components box is connected securely.
▪ All field wiring must be performed in accordance with
the wiring diagram supplied with the product.
▪ NEVER squeeze bundled cables and make sure they
do not come in contact with the piping and sharp
edges. Make sure no external pressure is applied to the
terminal connections.
▪ Make sure all covers are closed before starting up the
unit.
NOTICE
▪ Make sure to install earth wiring. Do NOT earth the unit
to a utility pipe, surge absorber, or telephone earth.
Incomplete earth may cause electrical shock.
Only applicable if the power supply is three‑phase, and the
compressor has an ON/OFF starting method.
If there exists the possibility of reversed phase after a
momentary black out and the power goes on and off while
the product is operating, attach a reversed phase
protection circuit locally. Running the product in reversed
phase can break the compressor and other parts.
▪ Make sure to use a dedicated power circuit. NEVER
use a power supply shared by another appliance.
▪ Make sure to install the required fuses or circuit
breakers.
▪ Make sure to install an earth leakage protector. Failure
to do so may cause electric shock or fire.
▪ When installing the earth leakage protector, make sure
it is compatible with the inverter (resistant to high
frequency electric noise) to avoid unnecessary opening
of the earth leakage protector.
2
About the documentation
2.1
About this document
Target audience
Authorised installers
Documentation set
This document is part of a documentation set. The complete set
consists of:
▪ General safety precautions:
▪ Safety instructions that you must read before installing
▪ Format: Paper (in the box of the indoor unit)
▪ Indoor unit installation manual:
▪ Installation instructions
▪ Format: Paper (in the box of the indoor unit)
▪ Outdoor unit installation manual:
▪ Installation instructions
▪ Format: Paper (in the box of the outdoor unit)
Installer reference guide
6
ERHQ+ERLQ011~016 + EHBH/X11+16CB
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P384974-1B – 2017.04
3 About the box
▪ Installer reference guide:
▪ Preparation of the installation, good practices, reference data,…
▪ Format: Digital files on http://www.daikineurope.com/supportand-manuals/product-information/
▪ Addendum book for optional equipment:
▪ Additional info about how to install optional equipment
▪ Format: Paper (in the box of the indoor unit) + Digital files on
http://www.daikineurope.com/support-and-manuals/productinformation/
Latest revisions of the supplied documentation may be available on
the regional Daikin website or via your dealer.
The original documentation is written in English. All other languages
are translations.
About the box
3.1
Overview: About the box
This chapter describes what you have to do after the boxes with the
outdoor and indoor unit are delivered on-site.
It contains information about:
▪ Unpacking and handling the units
▪ Removing the accessories from the units
Keep the following in mind:
▪ At delivery, the unit must be checked for damage. Any damage
must be reported immediately to the carrier's claims agent.
▪ Bring the packed unit as close as possible to its final installation
position to prevent damage during transport.
Technical engineering data
▪ A subset of the latest technical data is available on the regional
Daikin website (publicly accessible).
▪ The full set of latest technical data is available on the Daikin
extranet (authentication required).
2.2
3
Installer reference guide at a
glance
3.2
Outdoor unit
3.2.1
To unpack the outdoor unit
1
2
Description
Chapter
General safety
precautions
Safety instructions that you must read
before installing
About the documentation
What documentation exists for the
installer
About the box
How to unpack the units and remove
their accessories
About the units and
options
▪ How to identify the units
Application guidelines
Various installation setups of the system
Preparation
What to do and know before going
on‑site
Installation
What to do and know to install the
system
Configuration
What to do and know to configure the
system after it is installed
Commissioning
What to do and know to commission the
system after it is configured
Hand‑over to the user
What to give and explain to the user
Maintenance and service
How to maintain and service the units
Troubleshooting
What to do in case of problems
Disposal
How to dispose of the system
Technical data
Specifications of the system
3.2.2
Glossary
Definition of terms
Carry the unit slowly as shown:
Field settings table
Table to be filled in by the installer, and
kept for future reference
▪ Possible combinations of units and
options
Note: There is also an installer settings
table in the user reference guide. This
table has to be filled in by the installer
and handed over to the user.
To handle the outdoor unit
102~114 kg
CAUTION
To avoid injury, do NOT touch the air inlet or aluminium
fins of the unit.
ERHQ+ERLQ011~016 + EHBH/X11+16CB
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P384974-1B – 2017.04
Installer reference guide
7
3 About the box
3.2.3
To remove the accessories from the
outdoor unit
a
1×
b
c
2×
1×
INFORMATION
Do NOT throw away the upper cardboard cover. On the
outside of the cardboard cover, the installation pattern is
printed.
d
1×
3.3.2
2
e
1×
1×
f
1×
g
1×
The general safety precautions, the indoor unit installation manual,
the operation manual and the addendum book for optional
equipment are located in the upper part of the box. Follow the
procedure below to remove the other accessories.
1
1
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
To remove the accessories from the
indoor unit
Remove the tape.
Outdoor unit installation manual
Cable tie
Fluorinated greenhouse gases label
Multilingual fluorinated greenhouse gases label
Screw (only for ERLQ)
Thermistor fixing plate (spare) (only for ERLQ)
Thermistor fixture (only for ERLQ)
3.3
Indoor unit
3.3.1
To unpack the indoor unit
2×
2
Tilt the bottom side of the front panel upwards and remove it.
3
Remove the accessories.
g
h
e+f
a
a
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
1×
1×
2×
a
General safety precautions, indoor unit installation manual,
operation manual and addendum book for optional
equipment
Installer reference guide
8
2×
a
b
1×
1×
1×
1×
General safety precautions
Addendum book for optional equipment
ERHQ+ERLQ011~016 + EHBH/X11+16CB
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P384974-1B – 2017.04
4 About the units and options
c
d
e
f
g
h
Indoor unit installation manual
Operation manual
Sealing ring for shut-off valve
Shut-off valve
User interface cover
Top plate of indoor unit
4
About the units and options
4.1
Overview: About the units and
options
4.2.2
Identification label: Indoor unit
Location
This chapter contains information about:
Model identification
▪ Identifying the outdoor unit
Example: E HB H 04 CB 3V
▪ Identifying the indoor unit
Code
Description
▪ Combining outdoor and indoor units
E
European model
▪ Combining the outdoor unit with options
HB
Wall-mounted indoor unit
▪ Combining the indoor unit with options
H
H=Heating only
4.2
04
Capacity class
CB
Model series
3V
Backup heater model
X=Heating/cooling
Identification
NOTICE
When installing or servicing several units at the same time,
make sure NOT to switch the service panels between
different models.
4.2.1
Identification label: Outdoor unit
Location
4.3
Combining units and options
4.3.1
Possible options for the outdoor unit
Demand PCB (KRP58M51) (only for ERLQ)
▪ Limits the maximum current. However, this also decreases the
heating/cooling capacity of the system.
▪ Only the "Setting of demand running" function of the demand PCB
is applicable.
▪ For installation instructions, see the installation manual of the
demand PCB.
Snow cover (EK016SNC) (only for ERLQ)
▪ Prevents the outdoor unit from being snowed up.
Model identification
▪ Recommended in areas with low ambient temperatures or heavy
snowfall.
▪ ERLQ: Contains components (insulation, bottom plate heater, …)
to prevent freeze-up in areas with low ambient temperature and
high humidity.
▪ For installation instructions, see the installation manual of the
snow cover.
▪ ERHQ: Does NOT contain these components.
Drain plug kit (EKDK04) (only for ERHQ)
Example: ER L Q 011 CA W1
▪ Gathers the condensate from the outdoor unit and guides it away
through 1 plug in the bottom plate.
Code
Explanation
ER
European split outdoor pair heat pump
L
H=Low water temperature – ambient zone:
0⁠~⁠−⁠10°C
L=Low water temperature – ambient zone:
−⁠10⁠~⁠−⁠20°C
Q
Refrigerant R410A
011
Capacity class
CA
Model series
W1
Power supply
▪ For ERLQ: Drain plug kit is not applicable.
▪ For ERHQ: Drain plug kit is option.
▪ Cannot be combined with bottom plate heater.
▪ For installation instructions, see the installation manual of the
drain plug kit.
Bottom plate heater (EKBPHTH16A) (only for ERHQ in
combination with C* indoor unit)
▪ Prevents freeze-up of the bottom plate.
▪ Recommended in areas with low ambient temperature and high
humidity.
▪ For ERLQ: Bottom plate heater is standard (factory-mounted).
▪ For ERHQ: Bottom plate heater is option.
▪ Cannot be combined with drain plug kit.
▪ If you install EKBPHTH16A, you also have to install the digital I/O
PCB (EKRP1HB).
ERHQ+ERLQ011~016 + EHBH/X11+16CB
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P384974-1B – 2017.04
Installer reference guide
9
4 About the units and options
▪ For installation instructions, see the installation manual of the
bottom plate heater and addendum book for optional equipment.
4.3.2
Possible options for the indoor unit
For installation instructions, see the installation manual of the digital
I/O PCB and addendum book for optional equipment.
Demand PCB (EKRP1AHTA)
User interface (EKRUCBL*)
To enable the power saving consumption control by digital inputs
you must install the demand PCB.
The user interface and a possible additional user interface are
available as an option.
For installation instructions, see the installation manual of the
demand PCB and addendum book for optional equipment.
The additional user interface can be connected:
Remote indoor sensor (KRCS01-1)
▪ To have both:
▪ control close to the indoor unit,
By default the internal user interface sensor will be used as room
temperature sensor.
▪ room thermostat functionality in the principal space to be
heated.
As an option the remote indoor sensor can be installed to measure
the room temperature on another location.
▪ To have an interface containing other languages.
For installation instructions, see the installation manual of the remote
indoor sensor and addendum book for optional equipment.
Following user interfaces are available:
▪ EKRUCBL1 contains following languages: German, French,
Dutch, Italian.
▪ EKRUCBL2 contains following languages: English, Swedish,
Norwegian, Finnish.
▪ EKRUCBL3 contains following languages: English, Spanish,
Greek, Portuguese.
▪ EKRUCBL4 contains following languages: English, Turkish,
Polish, Romanian.
▪ EKRUCBL5 contains following languages: German, Czech,
Slovenian, Slovakian.
INFORMATION
▪ The remote indoor sensor can only be used in case the
user interface is configured with room thermostat
functionality.
▪ You can only connect either the remote indoor sensor
or the remote outdoor sensor.
Remote outdoor sensor (EKRSCA1)
By default the sensor inside the outdoor unit will be used to measure
the outdoor temperature.
▪ EKRUCBL6 contains following languages: English, Croatian,
Hungarian, Estonian.
As an option the remote outdoor sensor can be installed to measure
the outdoor temperature on another location (e.g. to avoid direct
sunlight) to have an improved system behaviour.
▪ EKRUCBL7 contains following languages: English, German,
Russian, Danish.
For installation instructions, see the installation manual of the remote
outdoor sensor.
Languages on the user interface can be uploaded by PC software or
copied from an user interface to the other.
For installation instructions, see "7.9.11 To connect the user
interface" on page 45.
INFORMATION
You can only connect either the remote indoor sensor or
the remote outdoor sensor.
PC configurator (EKPCCAB)
Simplified user interface (EKRUCBS)
▪ The simplified user interface can only be used in combination with
the main user interface.
▪ The simplified user interface acts as room thermostat and needs
to be installed in the room that you want it to control.
For installation instructions, see the installation and operation
manual of the simplified user interface.
Room thermostat (EKRTWA, EKRTR1, RTRNETA)
You can connect an optional room thermostat to the indoor unit. This
thermostat can either be wired (EKRTWA) or wireless (EKRTR1 and
RTRNETA). Thermostat RTRNETA can only be used in heating-only
systems.
For installation instructions, see the installation manual of the room
thermostat and addendum book for optional equipment.
Remote sensor for wireless thermostat (EKRTETS)
You can use a wireless indoor temperature sensor (EKRTETS) only
in combination with the wireless thermostat (EKRTR1).
For installation intructions, see the installation manual of the room
thermostat and addendum book for optional equipment.
Digital I/O PCB (EKRP1HB)
The digital I/O PCB is required to provide following signals:
The PC cable makes a connection between the switch box of the
indoor unit and a PC. It gives the possibility to upload different
language files to the user interface and indoor parameters to the
indoor unit. For the available language files, contact your local
dealer.
The software and corresponding operating instructions are available
on
http://www.daikineurope.com/support-and-manuals/softwaredownloads/.
For installation instructions, see the installation manual of the PC
cable and "8 Configuration" on page 49.
Heat pump convector (FWXV)
For providing space heating/cooling, it is possible to use heat pump
convectors (FWXV).
For installation instructions, refer to the installation manual of the
heat pump convectors, and the addendum book for optional
equipment.
Drain pan kit (EKHBDPCA2)
The drain pan is required to drain accumulated condensation from
the indoor unit. It is required during low temperature cooling
operation of the indoor unit and when the leaving water temperature
is <18°C.
▪ Alarm output
For installation instructions, see the installation manual of the drain
pan kit.
▪ Space heating/cooling On/OFF output
Solar kit (EKSOLHW)
▪ Changeover to external heat source
The solar kit is required to connect the solar application with the
domestic hot water tank.
Installer reference guide
10
ERHQ+ERLQ011~016 + EHBH/X11+16CB
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P384974-1B – 2017.04
5 Application guidelines
LAN adapter for smartphone control (BRP069A62)
For installation, see the installation manual of the solar kit and
addendum book for optional equipment.
Domestic hot water tank
You can install this LAN adapter to control the system via a
smartphone app.
The domestic hot water tank can be connected to the indoor unit for
providing domestic hot water.
For installation instructions, see the installation manual of the LAN
adapter.
LAN adapter for smartphone control + Smart Grid applications
(BRP069A61)
4.3.3
You can install this LAN adapter to:
Possible combinations of indoor unit and
outdoor unit
Outdoor unit
▪ Control the system via a smartphone app.
Indoor unit
EHBH/X11
EHBH/X16
ERHQ011+ERLQ011
O
—
ERHQ014+ERLQ014
—
O
ERHQ016+ERLQ016
—
O
▪ Use the system in various Smart Grid applications.
For installation instructions, see the installation manual of the LAN
adapter.
4.3.4
Possible combinations of indoor unit and domestic hot water tank
Indoor unit
Domestic hot water tank
EKHWS
EKHWSU
EKHWE
EKHWET
EHBH16CB3V
O
O
O
O
EHBX16CB3V
O
O
O
O
EHBH16CB9W
O
O
O
O
EHBX16CB9W
O
O
O
O
5
Application guidelines
5.1
Overview: Application guidelines
Once the space heating/cooling requirements are clear, Daikin
recommends to follow the setup guidelines below.
NOTICE
If an external room thermostat is used, the external room
thermostat will control the room frost protection. However,
the room frost protection is only possible if the leaving
water temperature control on the unit's user interface is
turned ON.
The purpose of the application guidelines is to give a glance of the
possibilities of the Daikin heat pump system.
NOTICE
▪ The illustrations in the application guidelines are meant
for reference only, and are NOT to be used as detailed
hydraulic
diagrams.
The
detailed
hydraulic
dimensioning and balancing are NOT shown, and are
the responsibility of the installer.
▪ For more information about the configuration settings to
optimize heat pump operation, see "8 Configuration" on
page 49.
This chapter contains application guidelines for:
▪ Setting up the space heating/cooling system
▪ Setting up an auxiliary heat source for space heating
INFORMATION
In case an external room thermostat is used and room frost
protection needs to be guaranteed in all conditions, then
you have to set auto emergency [A.6.C] to 1.
5.2.1
Single room
Under floor heating or radiators – Wired room
thermostat
Setup
▪ Setting up the domestic hot water tank
A
B
▪ Setting up the energy metering
▪ Setting up the power consumption
▪ Setting up an external temperature sensor
5.2
Setting up the space heating/
cooling system
a
The heat pump system supplies leaving water to heat emitters in one
or more rooms.
Because the system offers a wide flexibility to control the
temperature in each room, you need to answer the following
questions first:
▪ How many rooms are heated or cooled by the Daikin heat pump
system?
A
B
a
Main leaving water temperature zone
One single room
User interface used as room thermostat
▪ The under floor heating or radiators are directly connected to the
indoor unit.
▪ Which heat emitter types are used in each room and what is their
design leaving water temperature?
ERHQ+ERLQ011~016 + EHBH/X11+16CB
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P384974-1B – 2017.04
Installer reference guide
11
5 Application guidelines
▪ The room temperature is controlled by the user interface, which is
used as room thermostat. Possible installations:
▪ User interface installed in the room and used as room
thermostat
▪ User interface installed at the indoor unit and used for control
close to the indoor unit + user interface installed in the room
and used as room thermostat
Configuration
Setting
Value
Unit temperature control:
2 (RT control): Unit operation is
decided based on the ambient
temperature of the user interface.
▪ #: [A.2.1.7]
▪ Code: [C-07]
Number of water temperature
zones:
0 (1 LWT zone): Main
Configuration
Setting
Value
Unit temperature control:
1 (Ext RT control): Unit operation
is decided by the external
thermostat.
▪ #: [A.2.1.7]
▪ Code: [C-07]
Number of water temperature
zones:
0 (1 LWT zone): Main
▪ #: [A.2.1.8]
▪ Code: [7-02]
External room thermostat for the 1 (Thermo ON/OFF): When the
main zone:
used external room thermostat or
heat pump convector can only
▪ #: [A.2.2.4]
send a thermo ON/OFF
▪ Code: [C-05]
condition.
▪ #: [A.2.1.8]
Benefits
▪ Code: [7-02]
▪ Wireless. The Daikin external room thermostat is available in a
wireless version.
Benefits
▪ Cost effective. You do NOT need an additional external room
thermostat.
▪ Highest comfort and efficiency. The smart room thermostat
functionality can decrease or increase the desired leaving water
temperature based on the actual room temperature (modulation).
This results in:
▪ Stable room temperature matching the desired temperature
(higher comfort)
▪ Efficiency. Although the external room thermostat only sends ON/
OFF signals, it is specifically designed for the heat pump system.
▪ Comfort. In case of under floor heating, the wireless external
room thermostat prevents condensation on the floor during cooling
operation by measuring the room humidity.
Heat pump convectors
Setup
▪ Less ON/OFF cycles (more quiet, higher comfort and higher
efficiency)
A
B
▪ Lowest possible leaving water temperature (higher efficiency)
▪ Easy. You can easily set the desired room temperature via the
user interface:
▪ For your daily needs, you can use preset values and schedules.
▪ To deviate from your daily needs, you can temporarily overrule
the preset values and schedules, use the holiday mode…
Under floor heating or radiators – Wireless room
thermostat
Setup
a
A
B
a
Main leaving water temperature zone
One single room
Remote controller of the heat pump convectors
▪ The heat pump convectors are directly connected to the indoor
unit.
A
B
▪ The desired room temperature is set via the remote controller of
the heat pump convectors.
▪ The space heating/cooling demand signal is sent to one digital
input on the indoor unit (X2M/1 and X2M/4).
a
A
B
a
b
▪ The space operation mode is sent to the heat pump convectors by
one digital output on the indoor unit (X2M/32 and X2M/33).
b
Main leaving water temperature zone
One single room
Receiver for wireless external room thermostat
Wireless external room thermostat
▪ The under floor heating or radiators are directly connected to the
indoor unit.
▪ The room temperature is controlled by the wireless external room
thermostat (optional equipment EKRTR1).
INFORMATION
When using multiple heat pump convectors, make sure
each one receives the infrared signal from the remote
controller of the heat pump convectors.
Configuration
Setting
Unit temperature control:
▪ #: [A.2.1.7]
Value
1 (Ext RT control): Unit operation
is decided by the external
thermostat.
▪ Code: [C-07]
Installer reference guide
12
ERHQ+ERLQ011~016 + EHBH/X11+16CB
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P384974-1B – 2017.04
5 Application guidelines
Setting
Setting
Value
Number of water temperature
zones:
0 (1 LWT zone): Main
Value
Number of water temperature
zones:
0 (1 LWT zone): Main
▪ #: [A.2.1.8]
▪ #: [A.2.1.8]
▪ Code: [7-02]
▪ Code: [7-02]
External room thermostat for the 1 (Thermo ON/OFF): When the
main zone:
used external room thermostat or
heat pump convector can only
▪ #: [A.2.2.4]
send a thermo ON/OFF
▪ Code: [C-05]
condition. No separation between
heating or cooling demand.
External room thermostat for the 1 (Thermo ON/OFF): When the
main zone:
used external room thermostat or
heat pump convector can only
▪ #: [A.2.2.4]
send a thermo ON/OFF
▪ Code: [C-05]
condition. No separation between
heating or cooling demand.
Benefits
Benefits
▪ Cooling. The heat pump convector offers, besides heating
capacity, also excellent cooling capacity.
▪ Cooling. Heat pump convectors provide, besides heating
capacity, also excellent cooling capacity.
▪ Efficiency. Optimal energy efficiency because of the interlink
function.
▪ Efficiency. Under floor heating has the best performance with
Altherma LT.
▪ Stylish.
▪ Comfort. The combination of the two heat emitter types provides:
Combination: Under floor heating + Heat pump
convectors
▪ Space heating is provided by:
▪ The excellent cooling comfort of the heat pump convectors
5.2.2
▪ The under floor heating
▪ The heat pump convectors
▪ Space cooling is provided by the heat pump convectors only. The
under floor heating is shut off by the shut-off valve.
Setup
Multiple rooms – One LWT zone
If only one leaving water temperature zone is needed because the
design leaving water temperature of all heat emitters is the same,
you do NOT need a mixing valve station (cost effective).
Example: If the heat pump system is used to heat up one floor
where all the rooms have the same heat emitters.
Under floor heating or radiators – Thermostatic
valves
A
B
If you are heating up rooms with under floor heating or radiators, a
very common way is to control the temperature of the main room by
using a thermostat (this can either be the user interface or an
external room thermostat), while the other rooms are controlled by
so-called thermostatic valves, which open or close depending on the
room temperature.
M1
a
A
B
a
▪ The excellent heating comfort of the under floor heating
Setup
A
B
Main leaving water temperature zone
One single room
Remote controller of the heat pump convectors
C
T
▪ The heat pump convectors are directly connected to the indoor
unit.
▪ A shut-off valve (field supply) is installed before the under floor
heating to prevent condensation on the floor during cooling
operation.
▪ The desired room temperature is set via the remote controller of
the heat pump convectors.
▪ The space heating/cooling demand signal is sent to one digital
input on the indoor unit (X2M/1 and X2M/4)
▪ The space operation mode is sent by one digital output (X2M/32
and X2M/33) on the indoor unit to:
▪ The shut-off valve
Main leaving water temperature zone
Room 1
Room 2
User interface
▪ The under floor heating of the main room is directly connected to
the indoor unit.
▪ A thermostatic valve is installed before the under floor heating in
each of the other rooms.
Configuration
Setting
▪ #: [A.2.1.7]
A
B
C
a
▪ The room temperature of the main room is controlled by the user
interface used as thermostat.
▪ The heat pump convectors
Unit temperature control:
a
Value
1 (Ext RT control): Unit operation
is decided by the external
thermostat.
INFORMATION
Mind situations where the main room can be heated by
another heating source. Example: Fireplaces.
▪ Code: [C-07]
ERHQ+ERLQ011~016 + EHBH/X11+16CB
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P384974-1B – 2017.04
Installer reference guide
13
5 Application guidelines
Configuration
Setting
▪ Comfort. You can set the desired room temperature, including
schedules, for each room via the room thermostats.
Value
Unit temperature control:
2 (RT control): Unit operation is
decided based on the ambient
temperature of the user interface.
▪ #: [A.2.1.7]
Heat pump convectors - Multiple rooms
Setup
▪ Code: [C-07]
Number of water temperature
zones:
0 (1 LWT zone): Main
A
B
▪ #: [A.2.1.8]
C
▪ Code: [7-02]
Benefits
▪ Cost effective.
a
▪ Easy. Same installation as for one room, but with thermostatic
valves.
Under floor heating or radiators – Multiple external
room thermostats
A
B
C
a
Setup
A
B
C
M1
M2
▪ The user interface connected to the indoor unit decides the space
operation mode.
b
a
Main leaving water temperature zone
Room 1
Room 2
External room thermostat
Bypass valve
▪ For each room, a shut-off valve (field supplied) is installed to avoid
leaving water supply when there is no heating or cooling demand.
▪ The heating or cooling demand signals of each heat pump
convector are connected in parallel to the digital input on the
indoor unit (X2M/1 and X2M/4). The indoor unit will only supply
leaving water temperature when there is an actual demand.
INFORMATION
To increase comfort and performance, Daikin recommends
to install the valve kit option EKVKHPC on each heat pump
convector.
Configuration
Setting
Unit temperature control:
▪ A bypass valve must be installed to make water recirculation
possible when all shut-off valves are closed. To guarantee reliable
operation, provide a minimum water flow as described in table "To
check the water volume and flow rate" in "6.4 Preparing water
piping" on page 25.
▪ #: [A.2.1.7]
▪ The user interface connected to the indoor unit decides the space
operation mode. Mind that the operation mode on each room
thermostat must be set to match the indoor unit.
▪ #: [A.2.1.8]
▪ The room thermostats are connected to the shut-off valves, but do
NOT have to be connected to the indoor unit. The indoor unit will
supply leaving water all the time, with the possibility to program a
leaving water schedule.
Configuration
Setting
Unit temperature control:
▪ #: [A.2.1.7]
Main leaving water temperature zone
Room 1
Room 2
Remote controller of the heat pump convectors
▪ The desired room temperature is set via the remote controller of
the heat pump convectors.
a
A
B
C
a
b
a
Value
1 (Ext RT control): Unit operation
is decided by the external
thermostat.
▪ Code: [C-07]
Number of water temperature
zones:
0 (1 LWT zone): Main
▪ Code: [7-02]
Benefits
Compared with heat pump convectors for one room:
▪ Comfort. You can set the desired room temperature, including
schedules, for each room via the remote controller of the
heat pump convectors.
Value
0 (LWT control): Unit operation is
decided based on the leaving
water temperature.
▪ Code: [C-07]
Number of water temperature
zones:
0 (1 LWT zone): Main
▪ #: [A.2.1.8]
▪ Code: [7-02]
Benefits
Compared with under floor heating or radiators for one room:
Installer reference guide
14
ERHQ+ERLQ011~016 + EHBH/X11+16CB
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P384974-1B – 2017.04
5 Application guidelines
Combination: Under floor heating + Heat pump
convectors
CAUTION
When there is more than one leaving water zone, you must
ALWAYS install a mixing valve station in the main zone to
decrease (in heating)/increase (in cooling) the leaving
water temperature when the additional zone has demand.
Setup
A
B
Typical example:
C
Room (zone)
M1
Heat emitters: Design
temperature
Under floor heating:
Living room (main zone)
▪ In heating: 35°C
M1
a
▪ In
cooling:
20°C
(only
refreshment, no real cooling
allowed)
b
Bed rooms (additional zone)
A
B
C
a
b
Main leaving water temperature zone
Room 1
Room 2
External room thermostat
Remote controller of the heat pump convectors
Heat pump convectors:
▪ In heating: 45°C
▪ In cooling: 12°C
Setup
A
B
▪ For each room with heat pump convectors: The heat pump
convectors are directly connected to the indoor unit.
C
▪ For each room with under floor heating: Two shut-off valves (field
supply) are installed before the under floor heating:
▪ A shut-off valve to prevent hot water supply when the room has
no heating demand
a
▪ A shut-off valve to prevent condensation on the floor during
cooling operation of the rooms with heat pump convectors.
▪ For each room with heat pump convectors: The desired room
temperature is set via the remote controller of the heat pump
convectors.
d
c
a
D
E
▪ For each room with under floor heating: The desired room
temperature is set via the external room thermostat (wired or
wireless).
▪ The user interface connected to the indoor unit decides the space
operation mode. Mind that the operation mode on each external
room thermostat and remote controller of the heat pump
convectors must be set to match the indoor unit.
INFORMATION
To increase comfort and performance, Daikin recommends
to install the valve kit option EKVKHPC on each heat pump
convector.
Configuration
Setting
Unit temperature control:
▪ #: [A.2.1.7]
Value
0 (LWT control): Unit operation is
decided based on the leaving
water temperature.
▪ Code: [C-07]
Number of water temperature
zones:
0 (1 LWT zone): Main
▪ #: [A.2.1.8]
b
A
B
C
D
E
a
b
c
d
Additional leaving water temperature zone
Room 1
Room 2
Main leaving water temperature zone
Room 3
Remote controller of the heat pump convectors
User interface
Mixing valve station
Pressure regulating valve
INFORMATION
A pressure regulating valve should be implemented before
the mixing valve station. This is to guarantee the correct
water flow balance between the main leaving water
temperature zone and the additional leaving water
temperature zone in relation to the required capacity of
both water temperature zones.
▪ For the main zone:
▪ Code: [7-02]
▪ A mixing valve station is installed before the under floor heating.
5.2.3
▪ The pump of the mixing valve station is controlled by the ON/
OFF signal on the indoor unit (X2M/5 and X2M/7; normal closed
shut-off valve output).
Multiple rooms – Two LWT zones
If the heat emitters selected for each room are designed for different
leaving water temperatures, you can use different leaving water
temperature zones (maximum 2).
▪ The room temperature is controlled by the user interface, which
is used as room thermostat.
In this document:
▪ Main zone = Zone with the lowest design temperature in heating,
and the highest design temperature in cooling
▪ Additional zone = The other zone
ERHQ+ERLQ011~016 + EHBH/X11+16CB
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P384974-1B – 2017.04
Installer reference guide
15
5 Application guidelines
▪ For the additional zone:
5.3
▪ The heat pump convectors are directly connected to the indoor
unit.
▪ The desired room temperature is set via the remote controller of
the heat pump convectors for each room.
▪ The heating or cooling demand signals of each heat pump
convector are connected in parallel to the digital input on the
indoor unit (X2M/1 and X2M/4). The indoor unit will only supply
the desired additional leaving water temperature when there is
an actual demand.
▪ The user interface connected to the indoor unit decides the space
operation mode. Mind that the operation mode on each remote
controller of the heat pump convectors must be set to match the
indoor unit.
Configuration
▪ #: [A.2.1.7]
▪ Code: [C-07]
Value
2 (RT control): Unit operation is
decided based on the ambient
temperature of the user interface.
Note:
▪ Main room = user interface
used as room thermostat
functionality
▪ Other rooms = external room
thermostat functionality
Number of water temperature
zones:
▪ Space heating can be done by:
▪ The indoor unit
▪ An auxiliary boiler (field supply) connected to the system
▪ When the room thermostat requests heating, the indoor unit or the
auxiliary boiler starts operating depending on the outdoor
temperature (status of the changeover to external heat source).
When the permission is given to the auxiliary boiler, the space
heating by the indoor unit is turned OFF.
▪ Bivalent operation is only possible for space heating, NOT for
domestic hot water production. Domestic hot water is always
produced by the DHW tank connected to the indoor unit.
INFORMATION
Setting
Unit temperature control:
Setting up an auxiliary heat source
for space heating
▪ During heating operation of the heat pump, the
heat pump operates to achieve the desired
temperature set via the user interface. When weatherdependent operation is active, the water temperature is
determined automatically depending on the outdoor
temperature.
▪ During heating operation of the auxiliary boiler, the
auxiliary boiler operates to achieve the desired water
temperature set via the auxiliary boiler controller.
1 (2 LWT zones): Main +
additional
▪ #: [A.2.1.8]
▪ Code: [7-02]
In case of heat pump convectors: 1 (Thermo ON/OFF): When the
used external room thermostat or
External room thermostat for the
heat pump convector can only
additional zone:
send a thermo ON/OFF
▪ #: [A.2.2.5]
condition. No separation between
heating or cooling demand.
▪ Code: [C-06]
Shut-off valve output
Set to follow the thermo demand
of the main zone.
Shut-off valve
If the main zone must be shut off
during cooling mode to prevent
condensation on the floor, set it
accordingly.
At the mixing valve station
Set the desired main leaving
water temperature for heating
and/or cooling.
Benefits
▪ Comfort.
▪ The smart room thermostat functionality can decrease or
increase the desired leaving water temperature based on the
actual room temperature (modulation).
▪ The combination of the two heat emitter systems provides the
excellent heating comfort of the under floor heating, and the
excellent cooling comfort of the heat pump convectors.
▪ Efficiency.
▪ Depending on the demand, the indoor unit supplies different
leaving water temperature matching the design temperature of
the different heat emitters.
▪ Under floor heating has the best performance with Altherma LT.
Installer reference guide
16
ERHQ+ERLQ011~016 + EHBH/X11+16CB
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P384974-1B – 2017.04
5 Application guidelines
Setup
▪ Make sure the return water to the heat pump does NOT exceed
55°C. To do so:
▪ Integrate the auxiliary boiler as follows:
Only for EHBH/X
a
b c
d e
f
g
▪ Set the desired water temperature via the auxiliary boiler
controller to maximum 55°C.
h
▪ Install an aquastat valve in the return water flow of the
heat pump.
j
▪ Set the aquastat valve to close above 55°C and to open below
55°C.
M
h
▪ Install non-return valves.
i
▪ Make sure to only have one expansion vessel in the water circuit.
An expansion vessel is already premounted in the indoor unit.
▪ Install the digital I/O PCB (option EKRP1HB).
k
f
l
▪ Connect X1 and X2 (changeover to external heat source) on the
PCB to the auxiliary boiler thermostat.
i
▪ To setup the heat emitters, see "5.2 Setting up the space heating/
cooling system" on page 11.
n
Configuration
FHL1
FHL2
m
Via the user interface (quick wizard):
FHL3
▪ Set the use of a bivalent system as external heat source.
▪ Set the bivalent temperature and hysteresis.
NOTICE
▪ Make sure the bivalent hysteresis has enough
differential to prevent frequent changeover between
indoor unit and auxiliary boiler.
Only for EHVH/X
a
b c de g
f
h
j
▪ Because the outdoor temperature is measured by the
outdoor unit air thermistor, install the outdoor unit in the
shadow so that it is NOT influenced or turned ON/OFF
by direct sunlight.
M
h
f
▪ Frequent changeover may cause corrosion of the
auxiliary boiler. Contact the manufacturer of the
auxiliary boiler for more information.
i
Changeover to external heat source decided by an auxiliary
contact
k
l
▪ Only possible in external room thermostat control AND one
leaving water temperature zone (see "5.2 Setting up the space
heating/cooling system" on page 11).
i
n
▪ The auxiliary contact can be:
FHL1
m
▪ An outdoor temperature thermostat
FHL2
FHL3
▪ An electricity tariff contact
▪ A manually operated contact
▪ …
▪ Setup: Connect the following field wiring:
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
n
FHL1...3
Outdoor unit
Indoor unit
Heat exchanger
Backup heater
Pump
Shut-off valve
Motorised 3‑way valve (delivered with DHW tank)
Non-return valve (field supply)
Shut-off valve (field supply)
Collector (field supply)
Auxiliary boiler (field supply)
Aquastat valve (field supply)
DHW tank (EHBH/X: option)
Heat exchanger coil
Under floor heating
NOTICE
▪ Make sure the auxiliary boiler and its integration in the
system complies with applicable legislation.
L
H
Com
Indoor
X2M
1 2 3 4
Indoor/Auto/Boiler
A
N
BTI
A
H
K1A
K2A
Indoor
Auto
Boiler
K1A
K2A
K1A
BTI
X Y
K2A
Boiler thermostat input
Auxiliary contact (normal closed)
Heating demand room thermostat (optional)
Auxiliary relay for activation of indoor unit (field supply)
Auxiliary relay for activation of boiler (field supply)
Indoor unit
Automatic
Boiler
▪ Daikin is NOT responsible for incorrect or unsafe
situations in the auxiliary boiler system.
ERHQ+ERLQ011~016 + EHBH/X11+16CB
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P384974-1B – 2017.04
Installer reference guide
17
5 Application guidelines
5.4.3
NOTICE
▪ Make sure the auxiliary contact has enough differential
or time delay to prevent frequent changeover between
indoor unit and auxiliary boiler.
▪ If the auxiliary contact is an outdoor temperature
thermostat, install the thermostat in the shadow so that
it is NOT influenced or turned ON/OFF by direct
sunlight.
▪ Frequent changeover may cause corrosion of the
auxiliary boiler. Contact the manufacturer of the
auxiliary boiler for more information.
5.4
Setting up the domestic hot water
tank
Selecting the volume and desired
temperature for the DHW tank
People experience water as hot when its temperature is 40°C.
Therefore, the DHW consumption is always expressed as equivalent
hot water volume at 40°C. However, you can set the DHW tank
temperature at a higher temperature (example: 53°C), which is then
mixed with cold water (example: 15°C).
Selecting the volume and desired temperature for the DHW tank
consists of:
1
Determining the DHW consumption (equivalent hot water
volume at 40°C).
2
Determining the volume and desired temperature for the DHW
tank.
Possible DHW tank volumes
Type
The DHW tank can be:
Possible volumes
Integrated DHW tank
▪ Integrated in the indoor unit
▪ 180 l
▪ 260 l
▪ Installed standalone as option
Standalone DHW tank
5.4.1
▪ 150 l
System layout – Integrated DHW tank
▪ 200 l
▪ 300 l
Only for EHVH/X.
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
FHL1...3
UI
5.4.2
Outdoor unit
Indoor unit
Heat exchanger
Backup heater
Pump
Motorised 3‑way valve
DHW tank
Shut-off valve
Collector (field supply)
Under floor heating
User interface
▪ 500 l
Energy saving tips
▪ If the DHW consumption differs from day to day, you can program
a weekly schedule with different desired DHW tank temperatures
for each day.
▪ The lower the desired DHW tank temperature, the more cost
effective. By selecting a larger DHW tank, you can lower the
desired DHW tank temperature.
System layout – Standalone DHW tank
Only for EHBH/X.
a
b c
d e
f
g
h
▪ The heat pump itself can produce domestic hot water of maximum
55°C (50°C if outdoor temperature is low). The electrical
resistance integrated in the heat pump can increase this
temperature. However, this consumes more energy. Daikin
recommends to set the desired DHW tank temperature below
55°C to avoid using the electrical resistance.
▪ The higher the outdoor temperature, the better the performance of
the heat pump.
M
▪ If energy prices are the same during the day and the night,
Daikin recommends to heat up the DHW tank during the day.
▪ If energy prices are lower during the night, Daikin recommends
to heat up the DHW tank during the night.
f
FHL1
i
j
FHL2
FHL3
▪ When the heat pump produces domestic hot water, it cannot heat
up a space. When you need domestic hot water and space
heating at the same, Daikin recommends to produce the domestic
hot water during the night when there is lower space heating
demand.
Determining the DHW consumption
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
FHL1...3
Outdoor unit
Indoor unit
Heat exchanger
Backup heater
Pump
Shut-off valve
Motorised 3‑way valve
Collector (field supply)
DHW tank
Heat exchanger coil
Under floor heating
Answer the following questions and calculate the DHW consumption
(equivalent hot water volume at 40°C) using the typical water
volumes:
Question
Typical water volume
How many showers are needed
per day?
1 shower = 10 min×10 l/min =
100 l
How many baths are needed per 1 bath = 150 l
day?
How much water is needed at the 1 sink = 2 min×5 l/min = 10 l
kitchen sink per day?
Are there any other domestic hot —
water needs?
Installer reference guide
18
ERHQ+ERLQ011~016 + EHBH/X11+16CB
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P384974-1B – 2017.04
5 Application guidelines
Example: If the DHW consumption of a family (4 persons) per day is
as follows:
▪ 3 showers
M
▪ 1 bath
▪ 3 sink volumes
Determining the volume and desired temperature for the DHW
tank
Formula
V1=V2+V2×(T2−40)/(40−T1)
Example
If:
≥0.5 m
Then the DHW consumption = (3×100 l)+(1×150 l)+(3×10 l)=480 l
c
c.4
f
c.3
a
e
c.1
c.2
▪ V2=180 l
▪ T2=54°C
b
▪ T1=15°C
a
b
c
c1
c2
c3
c4
d
e
f
Then V1=280 l
V2=V1×(40−T1)/(T2−T1)
If:
▪ V1=480 l
▪ T2=54°C
▪ T1=15°C
Then V2=307 l
V1
V2
T2
T1
5.4.4
DHW consumption (equivalent hot water volume at 40°C)
Required DHW tank volume if only heated once
DHW tank temperature
Cold water temperature
5.4.6
DHW pump for instant hot water
Setup
h
Setup and configuration – DHW tank
c
a
▪ For large DHW consumptions, you can heat up the DHW tank
several times during the day.
▪ Electrical backup heater (for integrated DHW tank)
▪ Electrical booster heater (for standalone DHW tank)
f
g
a
b
c
f
g
h
i
▪ Thermodynamic cycle of the heat pump
▪ For more information about:
i
b
▪ To heat up the DHW tank to the desired DHW tank temperature,
you can use the following energy sources:
▪ Solar panels
d
Solar panels
Solar pump station
Solar pump station controller with temperature sensors
Tank temperature sensor
Return temperature sensor to solar panels
Supply temperature with flow meter from solar panels
Solar panel temperature sensor
Solar kit
DHW temperature sensor of the unit
Solenoid 2-way valve (only for UK). Obligatory for
compliance to UK building regulation G3.
Indoor unit
DHW tank
DHW pump (field supply)
Shower (field supply)
Cold water
Domestic hot water OUT
Recirculation connection
▪ By connecting a DHW pump, instant hot water can be available at
the tap.
▪ Optimizing the energy consumption for producing domestic hot
water, see "8 Configuration" on page 49.
▪ The DHW pump and the installation are field supply and the
responsibility of the installer.
▪ Connecting the electrical wiring of the standalone DHW tank to
the indoor unit, see the installation manual of the DHW tank.
▪ For more information
connection:
▪ Connecting the water piping of the standalone DHW tank to the
indoor unit, see the installation manual of the DHW tank.
5.4.5
Combination: Standalone DHW tank +
Solar panels
By connecting the DHW tank to solar panels, the DHW tank can be
heated by solar energy.
For installation instructions, see the installation manual of the solar
kit and addendum book for optional equipment.
about
connecting
the
recirculation
▪ for integrated DHW tank, see "7 Installation" on page 30,
▪ for separate DHW tank, see installation manual of DHW tank.
Configuration
▪ For more information, see "8 Configuration" on page 49.
▪ You can program a schedule to control the DHW pump via the
user interface. For more information, see the user reference
guide.
5.4.7
DHW pump for disinfection
Setup
h
c
a
i
b
a
b
c
d
e
ERHQ+ERLQ011~016 + EHBH/X11+16CB
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P384974-1B – 2017.04
d
f
e
g
Indoor unit
DHW tank
DHW pump (field supply)
Heater element (field supply)
Non‑return valve (field supply)
Installer reference guide
19
5 Application guidelines
f
g
h
i
Shower (field supply)
Cold water
Domestic hot water OUT
Recirculation connection
INFORMATION
You cannot combine calculating the consumed energy
(example: for backup heater) and measuring the
consumed energy (example: for outdoor unit). If you do so,
the energy data will be invalid.
▪ The DHW pump is field-supplied and its installation is the
responsibility of the installer.
▪ For the integrated DHW tank, the temperature of the DHW tank
can be set to maximum 60°C. If applicable legislation requires
higher temperature for disinfection, you can connect a DHW pump
and heater element as shown above.
▪ If applicable legislation requires disinfection of the water piping
until the tapping point, you can connect a DHW pump and heater
element (if needed) as shown above.
Configuration
The indoor unit can control DHW pump operation. For more
information, see "8 Configuration" on page 49.
5.5
Setting up the energy metering
▪ Via the user interface, you can read out the following energy data:
Calculating the consumed energy
▪ Only applicable for EHBH/X04+08 and EHVH/X04+08.
▪ The consumed energy is calculated internally based on:
▪ The actual power input of the outdoor unit
▪ The set capacity of the backup heater and booster heater
▪ The voltage
▪ Setup and configuration: To get accurate energy data, measure
the capacity (resistance measurement) and set the capacity via
the user interface for:
▪ The backup heater (step 1 and step 2)
▪ The booster heater
Measuring the consumed energy
▪ Produced heat
▪ Applicable for all models.
▪ Consumed energy
▪ Preferred method because of higher accuracy.
▪ You can read out the energy data:
▪ For space heating
▪ For space cooling
▪ For domestic hot water production
▪ Requires external power meters.
▪ Setup and configuration: When using electrical power meters, set
the number of pulses/kWh for each power meter via the user
interface. Consumed energy data for EHVH/X11+16 and EHBH/
X11+16 models will only be available if this setting is configured.
▪ You can read out the energy data:
INFORMATION
▪ Per month
When measuring the electrical power consumption, make
sure ALL power input of the system is covered by the
electrical power meters.
▪ Per year
INFORMATION
The calculated produced heat and consumed energy are
an estimation, the accuracy cannot be guaranteed.
5.5.3
Normal kWh rate power supply
General rule
5.5.1
Produced heat
Setup
The sensors used to calculate the produced heat are
calibrated automatically.
Connect the power meter to X5M/7 and X5M/8.
▪ Applicable for all models.
▪ The produced heat is calculated internally based on:
▪ The leaving and entering water temperature
▪ The flow rate
▪ The power consumption of the booster heater (if applicable) in
the domestic hot water tank
▪ Setup and configuration:
▪ No additional equipment needed.
▪ Only in case a booster heater is present in the system, measure
its capacity (resistance measurement) and set the capacity via
the user interface. Example: If you measure a booster heater
resistance of 17.1Ω, the capacity of the heater at 230 V is
3100 W.
5.5.2
One power meter that covers the entire system is sufficient.
INFORMATION
Power meter type
In case of…
Use a… power meter
▪ Single-phase outdoor unit
Single-phase
▪ Backup heater supplied from a
single-phase grid (i.e. the
backup heater model is *3V or
*9W connected to a singlephase grid)
In other cases (i.e. a three-phase Three-phase
outdoor unit and/or a *9W
backup heater model connected
to a three-phase grid)
Consumed energy
You can use the following methods to determine the consumed
energy:
▪ Calculating
▪ Measuring
Installer reference guide
20
ERHQ+ERLQ011~016 + EHBH/X11+16CB
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P384974-1B – 2017.04
5 Application guidelines
Example
▪ Power meter 2:
Single-phase power meter
Three-phase power meter
▪ In case of a single-phase backup heater configuration, use a
single-phase power meter.
▪ In other cases, use a three-phase power meter.
0 0 58
0 0 58
0 5
1 0
a
0 5
1 0
Example
a
Single-phase outdoor unit with a three-phase backup heater:
b


b
0 0 58
c
d
c
c
g
e f
A
B
C
e
c
f
A
a
d
0 5
1 0
c
h
g
B
0 0 58
0 5
1 0
C
e
e
A Outdoor unit
B Indoor unit
B Indoor unit
C DHW tank
C DHW tank
a Electrical cabinet (L1/N)
a Electrical cabinet (L1/L2/L3/N)
b Power meter (L1/N)
b Power meter (L1/L2/L3/N)
c Fuse (L1/N)
c Fuse (L1/L2/L3/N)
A
B
C
a
d Outdoor unit (L1/N)
d Fuse (L1/N)
b
e Indoor unit (L1/N)
e Outdoor unit (L1/L2/L3/N)
f Backup heater (L1/N)
f Indoor unit (L1/L2/L3/N)
g Booster heater (L1/N)
g Backup heater (L1/L2/L3/N)
g
h
A
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
h Booster heater (L1/N)
Exception
d


f
A Outdoor unit
b
e
i
j
B
C
Outdoor unit
Indoor unit
DHW tank
Electrical cabinet (L1/N): Preferential kWh rate power
supply
Electrical cabinet (L1/L2/L3/N): Normal kWh rate power
supply
Power meter (L1/N)
Power meter (L1/L2/L3/N)
Fuse (L1/N)
Fuse (L1/L2/L3/N)
Outdoor unit (L1/N)
Indoor unit (L1/N)
Backup heater (L1/L2/L3/N)
Booster heater (L1/N)
▪ You can use a second power meter if:
▪ The power range of one meter is insufficient.
▪ The electrical meter cannot easily be installed in the electrical
cabinet.
▪ 230 V and 400 V three-phase grids are combined (very
uncommon), because of technical limitations of power meters.
▪ Connection and setup:
▪ Connect the second power meter to X5M/9 and X5M/10.
▪ In the software the power consumption data of both meters is
added so you do NOT have to set which meter covers which
power consumption. You only need to set the number of pulses
of each power meter.
▪ See "5.5.4 Preferential kWh rate power supply" on page 21 for
an example with two power meters.
5.6
Setting up the power consumption
control
▪ The power consumption control:
▪ Is only applicable for EHBH/X04+08 and EHVH/X04+08.
▪ Allows you to limit the power consumption of the entire system
(sum of outdoor unit, indoor unit, backup heater and optional
booster heater).
▪ Configuration: Set the power limitation level and how it has to
be achieved via the user interface.
▪ The power limitation level can be expressed as:
▪ Maximum running current (in A)
▪ Maximum power input (in kW)
▪ The power limitation level can be activated:
5.5.4
Preferential kWh rate power supply
General rule
▪ Permanently
▪ By digital inputs
▪ Power meter 1: Measures the outdoor unit.
▪ Power meter 2: Measures the rest (i.e. indoor unit, backup heater
and optional booster heater).
Setup
▪ Connect power meter 1 to X5M/7 and X5M/8.
5.6.1
Permanent power limitation
Permanent power limitation is useful to assure a maximum power or
current input of the system. In some countries, legislation limits the
maximum power consumption for space heating and DHW
production.
▪ Connect power meter 2 to X5M/9 and X5M/10.
Power meter types
▪ Power meter 1: Single- or three-phase power meter according to
the power supply of the outdoor unit.
ERHQ+ERLQ011~016 + EHBH/X11+16CB
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P384974-1B – 2017.04
Installer reference guide
21
5 Application guidelines
Pi
DI
Pi
a
a
DI1
DI3
b
b
DI4
t
Pi
t
DI
a
b
t
Power input
Time
Digital input (power limitation level)
Power limitation active
Actual power input
Pi
t
DI
a
b
Power input
Time
Digital inputs (power limitation levels)
Power limitation active
Actual power input
Setup and configuration
Setup
▪ No additional equipment needed.
▪ Demand PCB (option EKRP1AHTA) needed.
▪ Set the power consumption control settings in [A.6.3.1] via the
user interface (for the description of all settings, see
"8 Configuration" on page 49):
▪ Maximum four digital inputs are
corresponding power limitation level:
▪ Set the desired power limitation level
▪ DI4 = strongest limitation (lowest energy consumption)
▪ For the specifications of the digital inputs, and for where to
connect them, refer to the wiring diagram.
Mind the following guidelines when selecting the desired
power limitation level:
Set the power consumption control settings in [A.6.3.1] via the user
interface (for the description of all settings, see "8 Configuration" on
page 49):
Power limitation activated by digital
inputs
Power limitation is also useful in combination with an energy
management system.
The power or current of the entire Daikin system is limited
dynamically by digital inputs (maximum four steps). Each power
limitation level is set via the user interface by limiting one of the
following:
▪ Select activation by digital inputs.
▪ Select the type of limitation (power in kW or current in A).
▪ Set the desired power limitation level corresponding to each digital
input.
INFORMATION
In case more than 1 digital input is closed (at the same
time), the digital input priority is fixed: DI4 priority>…>DI1.
5.6.3
Power limitation process
The outdoor unit has better efficiency than the electrical heaters.
Therefore, the electrical heaters are limited and turned OFF first.
The system limits power consumption in the following order:
1
Limits certain electrical heaters.
If… has priority
▪ Current (in A)
Then set the heater priority
via the user interface to…
Domestic hot water production Booster heater.
▪ Power input (in kW)
Result: The backup heater will
be turned OFF first.
The energy management system (field supply) decides the activation
of a certain power limitation level. Example: To limit the maximum
power of the entire house (lighting, domestic appliances, space
heating…).
D
a
5
4
3
c
B
Backup heater.
Result: The booster heater will
be turned OFF first.
Turns OFF all electrical heaters.
Limits the outdoor unit.
Turns OFF the outdoor unit.
Example
b
A
B
C
D
a
b
c
Space heating
2
3
4
A8P 12
C
Outdoor unit
Indoor unit
DHW tank
Energy management system
Power limitation activation (4 digital inputs)
Backup heater
Booster heater
Installer reference guide
22
the
Configuration
▪ Set a minimum power consumption of ±3 kW to
guarantee space heating and DHW production by
allowing at least one electrical heater (backup heater
step 1 or booster heater).
A
activate
NOTICE
▪ Set a minimum power consumption of ±3.6 kW to
guarantee defrost operation. Otherwise, if defrosting is
interrupted several times, the heat exchanger will
freeze up.
5.6.2
to
▪ DI1 = weakest limitation (highest energy consumption)
▪ Select full time limitation mode
▪ Select the type of limitation (power in kW or current in A)
used
If the configuration is as follows:
▪ Power limitation level does NOT allow operation of both booster
heater and backup heater (step 1 and step 2).
▪ Heater priority = Booster heater.
Then power consumption is limited as follows:
ERHQ+ERLQ011~016 + EHBH/X11+16CB
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P384974-1B – 2017.04
6 Preparation
Ph
INFORMATION
c
b
a
A
B
Ph
Ce
A
B
C
a
b
c
d
e
d
C
The external outdoor ambient sensor data (either averaged
or instantaneous) is used in the weather-dependent control
curves and in the automatic heating/cooling changeover
logic. To protect the outdoor unit, the internal sensor of the
outdoor unit is always used.
e
Ce
Produced heat
Consumed energy
Outdoor unit
Booster heater
Backup heater
Limited outdoor unit operation
Full outdoor unit operation
Booster heater turned ON
Backup heater step 1 turned ON
Backup heater step 2 turned ON
6
Preparation
6.1
Overview: Preparation
This chapter describes what you have to do and know before going
on-site.
It contains information about:
▪ Preparing the installation site
5.7
Setting up an external temperature
sensor
You can connect one external temperature sensor. It can measure
the indoor or outdoor ambient temperature. Daikin recommends to
use an external temperature sensor in the following cases:
Indoor ambient temperature
▪ In room thermostat control, the user interface is used as room
thermostat and it measures the indoor ambient temperature.
Therefore, the user interface must be installed on a location:
▪ Where the average temperature in the room can be detected
▪ That is NOT exposed to direct sunlight
▪ That is NOT near a heat source
▪ That is NOT affected by outside air or air draught because of,
for example, door opening/closing
▪ If this is NOT possible, Daikin recommends to connect a remote
indoor sensor (option KRCS01-1).
▪ Setup: For installation instructions, see the installation manual of
the remote indoor sensor.
▪ Configuration: Select room sensor [A.2.2.B].
Outdoor ambient temperature
▪ In the outdoor unit, the outdoor ambient temperature is measured.
Therefore, the outdoor unit must be installed on a location:
▪ Preparing the refrigerant piping
▪ Preparing the water piping
▪ Preparing the electrical wiring
6.2
Preparing installation site
Do NOT install the unit in places often used as work place. In case
of construction works (e.g. grinding works) where a lot of dust is
created, the unit must be covered.
Choose the installation location with sufficient place for carrying the
unit in and out of the site.
6.2.1
Installation site requirements of the
outdoor unit
INFORMATION
Also read the following requirements:
▪ General installation site requirements.
"General safety precautions" chapter.
See
the
▪ Service space requirements. See the "Technical data"
chapter.
▪ Refrigerant piping requirements (length, height
difference). See further in this "Preparation" chapter.
▪ Select a place where rain can be avoided as much as possible.
▪ At the north side of the house or at the side of the house where
the most heat emitters are located
▪ Take care that in the event of a water leak, water cannot cause
any damage to the installation space and surroundings.
▪ That is NOT exposed to direct sunlight
Do NOT install the unit in the following places:
▪ If this is NOT possible, Daikin recommends to connect a remote
outdoor sensor (option EKRSCA1).
▪ Configuration: Select outdoor sensor [A.2.2.B].
▪ Sound sensitive areas (e.g. near a bedroom), so that the
operation noise will cause no trouble.
Note: If the sound is measured under actual installation
conditions, the measured value might be higher than the sound
pressure level mentioned in Sound spectrum in the data book due
to environmental noise and sound reflections.
▪ During suspend (see "8 Configuration" on page 49), the outdoor
unit is turned down to reduce the standby energy losses. As a
result, the outdoor ambient temperature is NOT read out.
▪ In places where a mineral oil mist, spray or vapour may be
present in the atmosphere. Plastic parts may deteriorate and fall
off or cause water leakage.
▪ If the desired leaving water temperature is weather dependent, the
full time outdoor temperature measurement is important. This is
another reason to install the optional outdoor ambient temperature
sensor.
It is NOT recommended to install the unit in the following places
because it may shorten the life of the unit:
▪ Setup: For installation instructions, see the installation manual of
the remote outdoor sensor.
▪ Where the voltage fluctuates a lot
▪ In vehicles or vessels
▪ Where acidic or alkaline vapour is present
Seaside installation. Make sure the outdoor unit is NOT directly
exposed to sea winds. This is to prevent corrosion caused by high
levels of salt in the air, which might shorten the life of the unit.
ERHQ+ERLQ011~016 + EHBH/X11+16CB
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P384974-1B – 2017.04
Installer reference guide
23
6 Preparation
b
c
Install the outdoor unit away from direct sea winds.
Example: Behind the building.
Prevailing wind direction
Air outlet
The outdoor unit is designed for outdoor installation only, and for
ambient temperatures ranging 10~43°C in cooling mode and –
25~25°C in heating mode.
b
a
c
6.2.2
Additional installation site requirements
of the outdoor unit in cold climates
Protect the outdoor unit against direct snowfall and take care that the
outdoor unit is NEVER snowed up.
INFORMATION
If the outdoor unit is exposed to direct sea winds, install a
windbreaker.
You can use the optional snow cover (EK016SNC).
▪ Height of windbreaker≥1.5×height of outdoor unit
▪ Mind the service space requirements when installing the
windbreaker.
d
c
a
b
a
d
c
c
d
a
b
c
d
b
c
Sea wind
Building
Outdoor unit
Windbreaker
Strong winds (≥18 km/h) blowing against the outdoor unit’s air outlet
causes short circuit (suction of discharge air). This may result in:
a
b
c
d
▪ deterioration of the operational capacity;
▪ frequent frost acceleration in heating operation;
▪ disruption of operation due to decrease of low pressure or
increase of high pressure;
▪ a broken fan (if a strong wind blows continuously on the fan, it
may start rotating very fast, until it breaks).
It is recommended to install a baffle plate when the air outlet is
exposed to wind.
It is recommended to install the outdoor unit with the air inlet facing
the wall and NOT directly exposed to the wind.
6.2.3
Snow cover or shed
Pedestal (minimum height=150 mm)
Prevailing wind direction
Air outlet
Installation site requirements of the
indoor unit
INFORMATION
Also read the precautions and requirements in the
"General safety precautions" chapter.
▪ Mind the measurement guidelines:
Maximum refrigerant piping length between indoor
unit and outdoor unit
ERHQ: 75 m
(95 m)(a)
ERLQ: 50 m
(70 m)(a)
b
a
c
b
Minimum refrigerant piping length between indoor
unit and outdoor unit
3 m
Maximum height difference between indoor unit and
outdoor unit
30 m
Maximum distance between the 3‑way valve and
the indoor unit (for installations with domestic hot
water tank)
3 m
Maximum distance between the domestic hot water
tank and the indoor unit (for installations with
domestic hot water tank)
10 m
(a)
Parenthesised figure represents the equivalent length.
▪ Mind the following spacing installation guidelines:
a
Baffle plate
Installer reference guide
24
ERHQ+ERLQ011~016 + EHBH/X11+16CB
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P384974-1B – 2017.04
6 Preparation
200
200
▪ Insulation thickness
10
10
500
Ambient
temperature
Humidity
Minimum thickness
≤30°C
75% to 80% RH
15 mm
>30°C
≥80% RH
20 mm
6.4
Preparing water piping
6.4.1
Water circuit requirements
≥1150
INFORMATION
Also read the precautions and requirements in the
"General safety precautions" chapter.
(mm)
NOTICE
Do NOT install the unit in places such as:
In case of plastic pipes, make sure they are fully oxygen
diffusion tight according to DIN 4726. The diffusion of
oxygen into the piping can lead to excessive corrosion.
▪ In places where a mineral oil mist, spray or vapour may be
present in the atmosphere. Plastic parts may deteriorate and fall
off or cause water leakage.
▪ Sound sensitive areas (e.g. near a bedroom), so that the
operation noise will cause no trouble.
▪ The foundation must be strong enough to bear the weight of the
unit. Take the weight of the unit with a domestic hot water tank full
of water into account.
Make sure, in the event of a water leak, water cannot cause any
damage to the installation space and surroundings.
▪ In places with high humidity (max. RH=85%), for example a
bathroom.
▪ In places where frost is possible. Ambient temperature around the
indoor unit should be >5°C.
▪ The indoor unit is designed for indoor installation only and for
ambient temperatures ranging from 5~35°C.
6.3
INFORMATION
Also read the precautions and requirements in the
"General safety precautions" chapter.
▪ Piping material: Phosphoric acid deoxidised seamless copper.
▪ Piping diameter:
Ø9.5 mm (3/8")
Gas piping
Ø15.9 mm (5/8")
Thickness (t)
9.5 mm (3/8")
Annealed (O)
≥0.8 mm
15.9 mm (5/8")
Annealed (O)
≥1.0 mm
(a)
6.3.2
▪ Only use clean pipes
▪ Hold the pipe end downwards when removing burrs.
▪ Cover the pipe end when inserting it through a wall, to prevent
dust and/or particles entering the pipe.
▪ Glycol. For safety reasons, it is NOT allowed to add any kind of
glycol to the water circuit.
▪ Piping length. It is recommended to avoid long runs of piping
between the domestic hot water tank and the hot water end point
(shower, bath,…) and to avoid dead ends.
▪ Water flow. You can find the minimum required water flow for
indoor unit operation in the following table. In all cases, this flow
needs to be guaranteed. When the flow is lower, the indoor unit
will stop operation and display error 7H.
(a)
Temper grade
▪ Connecting piping – Air, moisture, dust. If air, moisture or dust
gets into the circuit, problems may occur. To prevent this:
▪ Piping diameter. Select the water piping diameter in relation to
the required water flow and the available external static pressure
of the pump. See "14 Technical data" on page 87 for the external
static pressure curves of the indoor unit.
▪ Piping temper grade and thickness:
Outer diameter
(Ø)
▪ Connecting piping – Tools. Only use appropriate tooling to
handle brass, which is a soft material. If NOT, pipes will get
damaged.
▪ Closed circuit. Use the indoor unit ONLY in a closed water
system. Using the system in an open water system will lead to
excessive corrosion.
Refrigerant piping requirements
Liquid piping
▪ Connecting piping – Force. Do NOT use excessive force when
connecting the piping. Deformation of the piping can cause
malfunctioning of the unit.
▪ Use a decent thread sealant to seal connections.
Preparing refrigerant piping
6.3.1
▪ Connecting piping – Legislation. Make all piping connections in
accordance with the applicable legislation and the instructions in
the "Installation" chapter, respecting the water inlet and outlet.
Ø
t
Depending on the applicable legislation and the unit's
maximum working pressure (see "PS High" on the unit
name plate), larger piping thickness might be required.
Refrigerant piping insulation
▪ Use polyethylene foam as insulation material:
▪ with a heat transfer rate between 0.041 and 0.052 W/mK (0.035
and 0.045 kcal/mh°C)
Minimum required flow rate during defrost/backup heater
operation
04+08 models
12 l/min
11+16 models
15 l/min
▪ Field supply components – Water. Only use materials that are
compatible with water used in the system and with the materials
used in the indoor unit.
▪ Field supply components – Water pressure and temperature.
Check that all components in the field piping can withstand the
water pressure and water temperature.
▪ with a heat resistance of at least 120°C
ERHQ+ERLQ011~016 + EHBH/X11+16CB
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P384974-1B – 2017.04
Installer reference guide
25
6 Preparation
▪ Water pressure. The maximum water pressure is 4 bar. Provide
adequate safeguards in the water circuit to ensure that the
maximum pressure is NOT exceeded.
▪ Valve – Separating circuits. When using a 3-way valve in the
water circuit make sure that the domestic hot water circuit and the
floor heating circuit is fully separated.
▪ Water temperature. All installed piping and piping accessories
(valve, connections,…) MUST withstand the following
temperatures:
▪ Valve – Change‑over time. When using a 2-way valve or a 3-way
valve in the water circuit, the maximum change-over time of the
valve must be 60 seconds.
INFORMATION
The following illustration is an example and might NOT
match your system layout.
65°C
i
▪ Domestic hot water tank – Capacity. To avoid stagnation of
water, it is important that the storage capacity of the domestic hot
water tank meets the daily consumption of domestic hot water.
i
T
a
b c
d e
f
h
g
▪ Domestic hot water tank – After installation. Immediately after
installation, the domestic hot water tank must be flushed with fresh
water. This procedure must be repeated at least once a day the
first 5 consecutive days after installation.
FCU1
FCU2
M
i
M
FCU3
i
FHL1
k
FHL2
FHL3
89°C
j
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
FCU1...3
FHL1...3
T
▪ Domestic hot water tank – Standstills. In cases where during
longer periods of time there is no consumption of hot water, the
equipment MUST be flushed with fresh water before usage.
▪ Domestic hot water tank – Disinfection. For the disinfection
function of the domestic hot water tank, see "8.3.2 Domestic hot
water control: advanced" on page 64.
f
l
▪ Filter. It is strongly recommended to install an additional filter on
the heating water circuit. Especially to remove metallic particles
from foul heating piping, it is recommended to use a magnetic or
cyclone filter, which can remove small particles. Small particles
may damage the unit and will NOT be removed by the standard
filter of the heat pump system.
Outdoor unit
Indoor unit
Heat exchanger
Backup heater
Pump
Shut-off valve
Motorised 3-way valve (supplied with the domestic hot
water tank)
Motorised 2-way valve (field supply)
Collector
Domestic hot water tank
Heat exchanger coil
Booster heater
Fan coil unit (optional) (field supply)
Floor heating loop (field supply)
Room thermostat (optional) (field supply)
▪ Thermostatic mixing valves. In accordance with the applicable
legislation, it may be necessary to install thermostatic mixing
valves.
▪ Hygienic measures. The installation must be in compliance with
the applicable legislation and may require additional hygienic
installation measures.
▪ Recirculation pump. In accordance with the applicable
legislation, it may be required to connect a recirculation pump in
between the hot water end point and the recirculation connection
of the domestic hot water tank.
a
c
d
b
a
b
c
d
Recirculation connection
Hot water connection
Shower
Recirculation pump
▪ Drainage – Low points. Provide drain taps at all low points of the
system in order to allow complete drainage of the water circuit.
6.4.2
▪ Drainage – Pressure relief valve. Provide a proper drain for the
pressure relief valve to avoid water coming into contact with
electrical parts.
The pre-pressure (Pg) of the vessel depends on the installation
height difference (H):
▪ Air vents. Provide air vents at all high points of the system, which
must also be easily accessible for servicing. An automatic air
purge is provided in the indoor unit. Check that the air purge is
NOT tightened too much, so that automatic release of air in the
water circuit is possible.
Formula to calculate the expansion vessel
pre-pressure
Pg=0.3+(H/10) (bar)
6.4.3
To check the water volume and flow rate
The indoor unit has an expansion vessel of 10 litre with a factory set
pre-pressure of 1 bar.
▪ Zn-coated parts. Never use Zn-coated parts in the water circuit.
Because the unit's internal water circuit uses copper piping,
excessive corrosion may occur.
To make sure that the unit operates properly:
▪ Non-brass metallic piping. When using non-brass metallic
piping, insulate the brass and non-brass properly so that they do
NOT make contact with each other. This to prevent galvanic
corrosion.
▪ You might need to adjust the pre-pressure of the expansion
vessel.
Installer reference guide
26
▪ You must check the minimum and maximum water volume.
Minimum water volume
Check that the total water volume in the installation is minimum
20 litre, the internal water volume of the indoor unit NOT included.
ERHQ+ERLQ011~016 + EHBH/X11+16CB
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P384974-1B – 2017.04
6 Preparation
INFORMATION
In critical processes, or in rooms with a high heat load,
extra water might be required.
Installation
height
difference(a)
≤7 m
Water volume
≤280 l
>280 l
No pre-pressure
adjustment is required.
NOTICE
When circulation in each space heating/cooling loop is
controlled by remotely controlled valves, it is important that
the minimum water volume is guaranteed, even if all of the
valves are closed.
a
b c
d
f
g
T1
T3
>7 m
M1
e f
M2
Do the following:
M3
▪ Increase
the
prepressure according to
the
required
installation
height
difference. The prepressure
should
increase by 0.1 bar for
each metre above 7 m.
FHL1
FHL2
FHL3
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
FHL1...3
T1...3
M1...3
▪ Decrease the prepressure according to
the required installation
height difference. The
pre-pressure
should
decrease by 0.1 bar for
each metre below 7 m.
▪ Check if the water
volume does NOT
exceed the maximum
allowed water volume.
h
T2
Do the following:
Outdoor unit
Indoor unit
Heat exchanger
Backup heater
Pump
Shut-off valve
Collector (field supply)
By-pass valve (field supply)
Floor heating loop (field supply)
Individual room thermostat (optional)
Individual motorised valve to control loop FHL1...3 (field
supply)
The expansion vessel of
the indoor unit is too
small for the installation.
In this case, it is
recommended to install
an extra vessel outside
the unit.
▪ Check if the water
volume does NOT
exceed the maximum
allowed water volume.
(a)
This is the height difference (m) between the highest point
of the water circuit and the indoor unit. If the indoor unit is
at the highest point of the installation, the installation height
is 0 m.
Maximum water volume
Minimum flow rate
Use the following graph to determine the maximum water volume for
the calculated pre-pressure.
Check that the minimum flow rate (required during defrost/backup
heater operation) in the installation is guaranteed in all conditions.
a
NOTICE
2.5
When circulation in each or certain space heating loops is
controlled by remotely controlled valves, it is important that
the minimum flow rate is guaranteed, even if all valves are
closed. In case the minimum flow rate cannot be reached,
a flow error 7H will be generated (no heating/operation).
2
1.5
Minimum required flow rate during defrost/backup heater
operation
1
0.5
0.3
0 20 50
100
a
b
150
200
250
300
350
400
450
b
Pre-pressure (bar)
Maximum water volume (l)
Example: Maximum water volume and expansion vessel prepressure
04+08 models
12 l/min
11+16 models
15 l/min
See the recommended procedure as described in "9.4 Checklist
during commissioning" on page 77.
6.4.4
Changing the pre-pressure of the
expansion vessel
NOTICE
Only a licensed installer may adjust the pre-pressure of the
expansion vessel.
When changing the default pre-pressure of the expansion vessel
(1 bar) is required, take following guidelines into account:
▪ Only use dry nitrogen to set the expansion vessel pre-pressure.
▪ Inappropriate setting of the expansion vessel pre-pressure will
lead to malfunction of the system.
Changing the pre-pressure of the expansion vessel should be done
by releasing or increasing nitrogen pressure through the Schrader
valve of the expansion vessel.
ERHQ+ERLQ011~016 + EHBH/X11+16CB
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P384974-1B – 2017.04
Installer reference guide
27
6 Preparation
a
WARNING
▪ If the power supply has a missing or wrong N-phase,
equipment might break down.
▪ Establish proper earthing. Do NOT earth the unit to a
utility pipe, surge absorber, or telephone earth.
Incomplete earthing may cause electrical shock.
▪ Install the required fuses or circuit breakers.
▪ Secure the electrical wiring with cable ties so that the
cables do NOT come in contact with sharp edges or
piping, particularly on the high-pressure side.
a
6.4.5
▪ Do NOT use taped wires, stranded conductor wires,
extension cords, or connections from a star system.
They can cause overheating, electrical shock or fire.
Schrader valve
▪ Do NOT install a phase advancing capacitor, because
this unit is equipped with an inverter. A phase
advancing capacitor will reduce performance and may
cause accidents.
To check the water volume: Examples
Example 1
The indoor unit is installed 5 m below the highest point in the water
circuit. The total water volume in the water circuit is 100 l.
WARNING
▪ All wiring must be performed by an authorized
electrician and must comply with the applicable
legislation.
No actions or adjustments are required.
Example 2
▪ Make electrical connections to the fixed wiring.
The indoor unit is installed at the highest point in the water circuit.
The total water volume in the water circuit is 350 l.
▪ All components procured on the site and all electrical
construction must comply with the applicable
legislation.
Actions:
▪ Because the total water volume (350 l) is more than the default
water volume (280 l), the pre-pressure must be decreased.
WARNING
▪ The required pre-pressure is:
Pg = (0.3+(H/10)) bar = (0.3+(0/10)) bar=0.3 bar.
The backup heater MUST have a dedicated power supply
and MUST be protected by the safety devices required by
the applicable legislation.
▪ The corresponding maximum water volume at 0.3 bar is 410 l.
(See the graph in the chapter above).
WARNING
ALWAYS use multicore cable for power supply cables.
▪ Because 350 l is lower than 410 l, the expansion vessel is
appropriate for the installation.
6.5.2
6.5
Preparing electrical wiring
6.5.1
About preparing electrical wiring
NOTICE
For applications with preferential kWh rate power supply:
INFORMATION
Also read the precautions and requirements in the
"General safety precautions" chapter.
INFORMATION
Also read "7.9.5 Specifications
components" on page 41.
of
standard
About preferential kWh rate power supply
wiring
The interruption of the outdoor unit power supply may not
be more than 2 hours to guarantee optimised startup
conditions for the compressor.
Electricity companies throughout the world work hard to provide
reliable electric service at competitive prices and are often
authorized to bill clients at benefit rates. E.g. time-of-use rates,
seasonal rates, Wärmepumpentarif in Germany and Austria, ...
This equipment allows for connection to such preferential kWh rate
power supply delivery systems.
Consult with the electricity company acting as provider at the site
where this equipment is to be installed to know whether it is
appropriate to connect the equipment in one of the preferential kWh
rate power supply delivery systems available, if any.
When the equipment is connected to such preferential kWh rate
power supply, the electricity company is allowed to:
▪ interrupt power supply to the equipment for certain periods of time;
▪ demand that the equipment only consumes a limited amount of
electricity during certain periods of time.
The indoor unit is designed to receive an input signal by which the
unit switches into forced off mode. At that moment, the outdoor unit
compressor will not operate.
Whether the power supply is interrupted or not, the wiring to the unit
is different.
Installer reference guide
28
ERHQ+ERLQ011~016 + EHBH/X11+16CB
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P384974-1B – 2017.04
6 Preparation
6.5.3
Overview of electrical connections except
external actuators
Normal power
supply
Preferential kWh rate power supply
Power supply is
NOT interrupted
b
a
0 0 58
Power supply is
interrupted
0 0 58
0 5
1 0
3
1
3
2
a
0 0 580
0 5
1 0
4
1
5
b
0 0 580
1 50
3
4
1
During preferential
kWh rate power
supply activation,
power supply is
interrupted
immediately or after
some time by the
electricity company.
In this case, the
Remark: The
indoor unit must be
electricity company
must always allow the powered by a
power consumption separate normal
power supply.
of the indoor unit.
During preferential
kWh rate power
supply activation,
power supply is NOT
interrupted. The
outdoor unit is turned
off by the control.
a
b
1
2
3
4
5
6.5.4
Normal power supply
Preferential kWh rate power supply
Power supply for outdoor unit
Power supply and interconnection cable to indoor unit
Power supply for backup heater
Preferential kWh rate power supply (voltage free contact)
Normal kWh rate power supply (to power the indoor unit
PCB in the event of power supply interruption of the
preferential kWh rate power supply)
Overview of electrical connections for
external and internal actuators
Description
Wires
Maximum
running
current
Outdoor unit and indoor unit power supply
(a)
2+GND or
3+GND
1
Power supply for
outdoor unit
2
3
Power supply and
interconnection cable to
indoor unit
3
Power supply for
backup heater
See table below. —
4
Preferential kWh rate
power supply (voltage
free contact)
2
5
Normal kWh rate power 2
supply
1 50
2
2
Item
(c)
(e)
6.3 A
User interface
6
User interface
2
(f)
Optional equipment
7
3‑way valve
3
100 mA(b)
8
Power supply for
booster heater and
thermal protection
(from indoor unit)
4+GND
(c)
9
Power supply for
booster heater (to
indoor unit)
2+GND
13 A
10
Domestic hot water
tank thermistor
2
(d)
11
Power supply for
bottom plate heater
2
(b)
12
Room thermostat
3 or 4
100 mA(b)
13
Outdoor ambient
temperature sensor
2
(b)
14
Indoor ambient
temperature sensor
2
(b)
15
Heat pump convector
4
100 mA(b)
Field supplied components
The following illustration shows the required field wiring.
16
Shut-off valve
2
100 mA(b)
INFORMATION
17
Electricity meter
2 (per meter)
(b)
The following illustration is an example and might NOT
match your system layout.
18
Domestic hot water
pump
2
(b)
19
Alarm output
2
(b)
20
Changeover to external 2
heat source control
(b)
21
Space cool/heat
operation control
2
(b)
22
Power consumption
digital inputs
2 (per input
signal)
(b)
23
Safety thermostat
2
(e)
c
20
12
15
b
13
7
21
16
22
23
14
17
18
6
9
19
M
M
8 10
d
e
(a)
(b)
(c)
(d)
(e)
a
a
b
c
d
e
(f)
Single power supply for outdoor unit, backup heater and
booster heater
Backup heater
Indoor unit
Domestic hot water tank
Booster heater
ERHQ+ERLQ011~016 + EHBH/X11+16CB
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P384974-1B – 2017.04
Refer to name plate on outdoor unit.
Minimum cable section 0.75 mm².
Cable section 2.5 mm².
The thermistor and connection wire (12 m) are delivered
with the domestic hot water tank.
Cable section 0.75 mm² till 1.25 mm²; maximum length:
50 m. Voltage-free contact shall ensure the minimum
applicable load of 15 V DC, 10 mA.
Cable section 0.75 mm² till 1.25 mm²; maximum length:
500 m. Applicable for both single user interface and dual
user interface connection.
NOTICE
More technical specifications of the different connections
are indicated on the inside of the indoor unit.
Installer reference guide
29
7 Installation
Backup heater
type
*3V
*9W
Power supply
Required number of
conductors
1× 230 V
2+GND
1× 230 V
2+GND + 2 bridges
3× 230 V
3+GND + 1 bridge
3× 400 V
4+GND
45°~90°
3
7
Installation
7.1
Overview: Installation
2
(4)
1×
This chapter describes what you have to do and know on-site to
install the system.
Typical workflow
1
Installation typically consists of the following stages:
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Mounting the outdoor unit.
Mounting the indoor unit.
Connecting the refrigerant piping.
Checking the refrigerant piping.
Charging refrigerant.
Connecting the water piping.
Connecting the electrical wiring.
Finishing the outdoor installation.
Finishing the indoor installation.
7.2.3
1
To open the indoor unit
Loosen and remove the 2 screws that fix the front panel.
INFORMATION
Depending on the units and/or the installation conditions, it
might be necessary to connect electrical wiring before you
can charge refrigerant.
7.2
Opening the units
7.2.1
About opening the units
At certain times, you have to open the unit. Example:
2×
2
Tilt the front panel towards you and remove the front panel.
▪ When connecting the refrigerant piping
▪ When connecting the electrical wiring
7.2.4
▪ When maintaining or servicing the unit
To open the switch box cover of the
indoor unit
DANGER: RISK OF ELECTROCUTION
Do NOT leave the unit unattended when the service cover
is removed.
7.2.2
4×
To open the outdoor unit
DANGER: RISK OF ELECTROCUTION
DANGER: RISK OF BURNING
7.3
Mounting the outdoor unit
7.3.1
About mounting the outdoor unit
When
You have to mount the outdoor and indoor unit before you can
connect the refrigerant and water piping.
Installer reference guide
30
ERHQ+ERLQ011~016 + EHBH/X11+16CB
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P384974-1B – 2017.04
7 Installation
Typical workflow
7.3.4
To install the outdoor unit
Mounting the outdoor unit typically consists of the following stages:
1
Providing the installation structure.
2
Installing the outdoor unit.
3
Providing drainage.
4
Preventing the unit from falling over.
5
Protecting the unit against snow and wind by installing a snow
cover and baffle plates. See "Preparing installation site" in
"6 Preparation" on page 23.
7.3.2
4× M12
Precautions when mounting the outdoor
unit
INFORMATION
Also read the precautions and requirements in the
following chapters:
▪ General safety precautions
To provide drainage
7.3.5
▪ Preparation
▪ Make sure that condensation water can be evacuated properly.
7.3.3
▪ Install the unit on a base to make sure that there is a proper
drainage in order to avoid ice accumulation.
To provide the installation structure
Check the strength and level of the installation ground so that the
unit will not cause any operating vibration or noise.
Fix the unit securely by means of foundation bolts in accordance
with the foundation drawing.
Prepare 4 sets of anchor bolts, nuts and washers (field supply) as
follows:
▪ Prepare a water drainage channel around the foundation to drain
waste water surrounding the unit.
▪ Avoid drain water flowing over the footpath, so that it does not
become slippery in case of ambient freezing temperatures.
▪ If you install the unit on a frame, install a waterproof plate within
150 mm of the bottom side of the unit in order to prevent the
invasion of water in the unit and to avoid the drain water dripping
(see the following illustration).
4× M12
INFORMATION
0
You can use the optional drain plug kit (EKDK04) (only for
ERHQ).
62
>150
)
55
(mm)
a
NOTICE
If drain holes of the outdoor unit are covered by a mounting
base or by floor surface, raise the unit to provide a free
space of more than 150 mm under the outdoor unit.
-3
45
(3
35
0
a
Make sure not to cover the drain holes of the bottom plate
of the unit.
20
The recommended height of the upper protruding part of
the bolts is 20 mm.
≥150 mm
INFORMATION
Drain holes
Model
NOTICE
Bottom view (mm)
ERHQ_V3
a
117
58
16
16
c
45
ERHQ+ERLQ011~016 + EHBH/X11+16CB
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P384974-1B – 2017.04
71
b
70 102
Fix the outdoor unit to the foundation bolts using nuts with
resin washers (a). If the coating on the fastening area is
stripped off, the nuts rust easily.
a
376
191
d (4×)
Installer reference guide
31
7 Installation
Model
7.4.2
Bottom view (mm)
ERHQ_W1
b
71
16
Precautions when mounting the indoor
unit
16
45
a
58
117
60 102
Also read the precautions and requirements in the
following chapters:
10
c
43
ERLQ
INFORMATION
378
a
35
▪ General safety precautions
d (4×)
191
▪ Preparation
b
71
16
c
7.4.3
36
99
CAUTION
61
Do NOT grasp the piping to lift the indoor unit.
60
a
b
c
d
7.3.6
To install the indoor unit
182
154
159
d (4×)
1
Lift the unit from the package.
Discharge side
Drain holes
Knockout hole (piping intake - downwards route)
Anchor points
60kg
To prevent the outdoor unit from falling
over
In case the unit is installed in places where strong wind can tilt the
unit, take following measure:
1
Prepare 2 cables as indicated in the following illustration (field
supply).
2
Place the 2 cables over the outdoor unit.
3
Insert a rubber sheet between the cables and the outdoor unit
to prevent the cable from scratching the paint (field supply).
4
Attach the cable’s ends. Tighten those ends.
2
Remove the 4 screws from the bottom of the unit. Unhook and
remove the side plates.
3
2
3
7.4
Mounting the indoor unit
7.4.1
About mounting the indoor unit
1 5×
3
Put the installation pattern (see packing) on the wall and follow
the steps as shown below.
When
You have to mount the outdoor and indoor unit before you can
connect the refrigerant and water piping.
2×
Typical workflow
Mounting the indoor unit typically consists of the following stages:
1
2
Installing the indoor unit.
Installing the drain pan kit (optional).
1
4
Installer reference guide
32
2
3
4
Lift the unit.
ERHQ+ERLQ011~016 + EHBH/X11+16CB
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P384974-1B – 2017.04
7 Installation
5×
1
2
3
7.4.4
To install the drain pan kit
If a drain pan kit (EKHBDPCA2) is required, install it before
connecting the refrigerant and water pipes and the electrical wiring.
To install, see the installation manual of the drain pan kit.
7.5
Connecting the refrigerant piping
7.5.1
About connecting the refrigerant piping
Before connecting the refrigerant piping
5
Tilt the top of the unit against the wall at the position of the 2
inserted screws.
6
Hook the unit against the wall.
Make sure the outdoor and indoor unit are mounted.
Typical workflow
Connecting the refrigerant piping involves:
2×
▪ Connecting the refrigerant piping to the outdoor unit
▪ Connecting the refrigerant piping to the indoor unit
▪ Installing oil traps
▪ Insulating the refrigerant piping
2×
1
7
2
▪ Keeping in mind the guidelines for:
3
▪ Pipe bending
▪ Flaring pipe ends
Assemble the unit.
▪ Brazing
▪ Using the stop valves
7.5.2
Precautions when connecting the
refrigerant piping
INFORMATION
Also read the precautions and requirements in the
following chapters:
1
▪ General safety precautions
2
1
2
2
▪ Preparation
DANGER: RISK OF BURNING
CAUTION
▪ Do NOT use mineral oil on flared part.
▪ Do NOT reuse piping from previous installations.
▪ NEVER install a drier to this R410A unit to guarantee
its lifetime. The drying material may dissolve and
damage the system.
2
ERHQ+ERLQ011~016 + EHBH/X11+16CB
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P384974-1B – 2017.04
Installer reference guide
33
7 Installation
Piping size
(mm)
NOTICE
Take the following precautions on refrigerant piping into
account:
▪ Avoid anything but the designated refrigerant to get
mixed into the refrigerant cycle (e.g. air).
Tightening
Flare
torque (N•m) dimensions (A)
(mm)
Ø9.5
33~39
12.8~13.2
Ø15.9
63~75
19.3~19.7
Flare shape
(mm)
90°±2
45 ±
° 2
A
R=0.4~0.8
▪ Only use R410A when adding refrigerant.
▪ Only use installation tools (e.g. manifold gauge set) that
are exclusively used for R410A installations to
withstand the pressure and to prevent foreign materials
(e.g. mineral oils and moisture) from mixing into the
system.
▪ Install the piping so that the flare is NOT subjected to
mechanical stress
7.5.4
Pipe bending guidelines
Use a pipe bender for bending. All pipe bends should be as gentle
as possible (bending radius should be 30~40 mm or larger).
7.5.5
▪ Protect the piping as described in the following table to
prevent dirt, liquid or dust from entering the piping.
To flare the pipe end
CAUTION
▪ Incomplete flaring may cause refrigerant gas leakage.
▪ Use caution when passing copper tubes through walls
(see figure below).
▪ Do NOT re-use flares. Use new flares to prevent
refrigerant gas leakage.
▪ Use flare nuts that are included with the unit. Using
different flare nuts may cause refrigerant gas leakage.
Unit
Installation period
Outdoor unit
1
Cut the pipe end with a pipe cutter.
2
Remove burrs with the cut surface facing down so that the
chips do not enter the pipe.
Protection method
>1 month
Pinch the pipe
<1 month
Pinch or tape the pipe
a
Do NOT open the refrigerant stop valve before checking
the refrigerant piping. When you need to charge additional
refrigerant it is recommended to open the refrigerant stop
valve after charging.
Remove the flare nut from the stop valve and put the flare nut
on the pipe.
4
Flare the pipe. Set exactly at the position as shown in the
following illustration.
A
Guidelines when connecting the
refrigerant piping
Flare tool for
R410A (clutch
type)
Take the following guidelines into account when connecting pipes:
▪ Coat the flare inner surface with ether oil or ester oil when
connecting a flare nut. Tighten 3 or 4 turns by hand, before
tightening firmly.
Cut exactly at right angles.
Remove burrs.
3
INFORMATION
7.5.3
b
a
b
Regardless of the
period
Indoor unit
A
5
0~0.5 mm
Conventional flare tool
Clutch type
Wing nut type
(Ridgid-type)
(Imperial-type)
1.0~1.5 mm
1.5~2.0 mm
Check that the flaring is properly made.
a
b
c
▪ Always use 2 wrenches together when loosening a flare nut.
a
b
c
▪ Always use a spanner and torque wrench together to tighten the
flare nut when connecting the piping. This to prevent nut cracking
and leaks.
a
7.5.6
b
c
Torque wrench
Spanner
Piping union
Flare nut
Installer reference guide
34
To braze the pipe end
The indoor unit and outdoor unit have flare connections. Connect
both ends without brazing. If brazing should be needed, take the
following into account:
d
a
b
c
d
Flare’s inner surface must be flawless.
The pipe end must be evenly flared in a perfect circle.
Make sure the flare nut is fitted.
▪ When brazing, blow through with nitrogen to prevent creation of
large quantities of oxidised film on the inside of the piping. This
film adversely affects valves and compressors in the refrigerating
system and prevents proper operation.
▪ Set the nitrogen pressure to 20 kPa (0.2 bar) (just enough so it
can be felt on the skin) with a pressure-reducing valve.
ERHQ+ERLQ011~016 + EHBH/X11+16CB
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P384974-1B – 2017.04
7 Installation
a
b
c
d
e
f
a
b
c
d
e
f
To open/close the stop valve
1
Remove the valve cover.
2
Insert a hexagon wrench (liquid side: 4 mm, gas side: 6 mm)
into the valve stem and turn the valve stem:
f
Refrigerant piping
Part to be brazed
Taping
Manual valve
Pressure-reducing valve
Nitrogen
▪ Do NOT use anti-oxidants when brazing pipe joints.
Residue can clog pipes and break equipment.
▪ Do NOT use flux when brazing copper-to-copper refrigerant
piping. Use phosphor copper brazing filler alloy (BCuP), which
does not require flux.
Flux has an extremely harmful influence on refrigerant piping
systems. For instance, if chlorine based flux is used, it will cause
pipe corrosion or, in particular, if the flux contains fluorine, it will
deteriorate the refrigerant oil.
7.5.7
Counterclockwise to open.
Clockwise to close.
3
When the valve stem cannot be turned any further, stop turning.
The valve is now opened/closed.
To handle the stem cap
▪ The stem cap is sealed where indicated with the arrow. Do NOT
damage it.
Using the stop valve and service port
To handle the stop valve
Take the following guidelines into account:
▪ The stop valves are factory closed.
▪ The following illustration shows each part required in handling the
valve.
▪ After handling the stop valve, tighten the stem cap, and check for
refrigerant leaks.
Item
a
Tightening torque (N∙m)
Stem cap, liquid side
13.5~16.5
Stem cap, gas side
22.5~27.5
b
a
b
c
d
c
To handle the service cap
d
▪ Always use a charge hose equipped with a valve depressor pin,
since the service port is a Schrader type valve.
Service port and service port cap
Valve stem
Field piping connection
Stem cap
▪ After handling the service port, tighten the service port cap, and
check for refrigerant leaks.
▪ Keep both stop valves open during operation.
Item
▪ Do NOT apply excessive force to the valve stem. Doing so may
break the valve body.
▪ Always make sure to secure the stop valve with a spanner, then
loosen or tighten the flare nut with a torque wrench. Do NOT place
the spanner on the stem cap, as this could cause a refrigerant
leak.
Tightening torque (N∙m)
Service port cap
7.5.8
1
11.5~13.9
To connect the refrigerant piping to the
outdoor unit
Do the following:
▪ Remove the service cover (a) with screw (b).
▪ Remove the piping intake plate (c) with screw (d).
a
a
b
a
b
Spanner
Torque wrench
▪ When it is expected that the operating pressure will be low (e.g.
when cooling will be performed while the outside air temperature
is low), sufficiently seal the flare nut in the stop valve on the gas
line with silicon sealant to prevent freezing.
b
d
2
c
Choose a piping route (a, b, c or d).
d
Silicon sealant, make sure there is no gap.
ERHQ+ERLQ011~016 + EHBH/X11+16CB
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P384974-1B – 2017.04
a
b
c
Installer reference guide
35
7 Installation
3
If you have chosen the downwards piping route:
WARNING
▪ Drill (a, 4×) and remove the knockout hole (b).
▪ Cut out the slits (c) with a metal saw.
Provide adequate measures to prevent that the unit can be
used as a shelter by small animals. Small animals that
make contact with electrical parts can cause malfunctions,
smoke or fire.
4× Ø6 mm
a
b
NOTICE
Precautions when making knockout holes:
▪ Avoid damaging the casing.
c
4
c
▪ After making the knockout holes, we recommend you
remove the burrs and paint the edges and areas
around the edges using repair paint to prevent rusting.
▪ Connect the liquid pipe (a) to the liquid stop valve.
▪ Connect the gas pipe (b) to the gas stop valve.
▪ When passing electrical wiring through the knockout
holes, wrap the wiring with protective tape to prevent
damage.
Do the following:
b
a
5
Do the following:
a
▪ Insulate the liquid piping (a) and the gas piping (b).
▪ Make sure the piping and piping insulation do NOT touch the
compressor (c), the compressor terminal cover (d), and the
compressor bolts (e). If the liquid pipe insulation might touch
the compressor terminal cover, adjust the height of the
insulation (f=no insulation around the compressor terminal
cover (d)).
▪ Seal the insulation ends (sealant etc.) (g).
h
h
c
f
c
Knockout hole
Burr
Sealant etc.
NOTICE
Make sure to open the stop valves after installing the
refrigerant piping and performing vacuum drying. Running
the system with the stop valves closed may break the
compressor.
7.5.9
g
d
b
a
b
c
1
To connect the refrigerant piping to the
indoor unit
Connect the liquid stop valve from the outdoor unit to the
refrigerant liquid connection of the indoor unit.
g
b
a
e
6
If the outdoor unit is installed above the indoor unit, cover the
stop valves (h, see above) with sealing material to prevent
condensed water on the stop valves from moving to the indoor
unit.
a
a
b
2
NOTICE
Connect the gas stop valve from the outdoor unit to the
refrigerant gas connection of the indoor unit.
Any exposed piping might cause condensation.
7
Reattach the service cover and the piping intake plate.
8
Seal all gaps (example: a) to prevent snow and small animals
from entering the system.
NOTICE
It is recommended that the refrigerant piping between
indoor and outdoor unit is installed in a ducting or the
refrigerant piping is wrapped with finishing tape.
7.5.10
a
Installer reference guide
36
b
Refrigerant liquid connection
Refrigerant gas connection
To determine if oil traps are required
If oil flows back into the outdoor unit's compressor, this might cause
liquid compression or deterioration of oil return. Oil traps in the rising
gas piping can prevent this.
ERHQ+ERLQ011~016 + EHBH/X11+16CB
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P384974-1B – 2017.04
7 Installation
If
7.6.3
Then
The indoor unit is installed Install an oil trap every 10 m (height
higher than the outdoor
difference).
unit
Checking refrigerant piping: Setup
f
a
a
c
R410A
b
10 m
b
d
a
b
c
d
e
f
a Rising gas piping with oil trap
b Liquid piping
The outdoor unit is
installed higher than the
indoor unit
e
Pressure gauge
Nitrogen
Refrigerant
Weighing machine
Vacuum pump
Stop valve
Oil traps are NOT required.
7.6.4
To check for leaks
NOTICE
7.6
Checking the refrigerant piping
Do NOT exceed the unit's maximum working pressure (see
"PS High" on the unit name plate).
7.6.1
About checking the refrigerant piping
NOTICE
Make sure to use a recommended bubble test solution
from your wholesaler. Do not use soap water, which may
cause cracking of flare nuts (soap water may contain salt,
which absorbs moisture that will freeze when the piping
gets cold), and/or lead to corrosion of flared joints (soap
water may contain ammonia which causes a corrosive
effect between the brass flare nut and the copper flare).
The outdoor unit's internal refrigerant piping has been factory tested
for leaks. You only have to check the outdoor unit's external
refrigerant piping.
Before checking the refrigerant piping
Make sure the refrigerant piping is connected between the outdoor
unit and the indoor unit.
Typical workflow
1
Charge the system with nitrogen gas up to a gauge pressure of
at least 200 kPa (2 bar). It is recommended to pressurize to
3000 kPa (30 bar) in order to detect small leaks.
2
Check for leaks by applying the bubble test solution to all
connections.
3
Discharge all nitrogen gas.
Checking the refrigerant piping typically consists of the following
stages:
1
2
Checking for leaks in the refrigerant piping.
Performing vacuum drying to remove all moisture, air or
nitrogen from the refrigerant piping.
If there is a possibility of moisture being present in the refrigerant
piping (for example, water may have entered the piping), first carry
out the vacuum drying procedure below until all moisture has been
removed.
7.6.2
Precautions when checking the
refrigerant piping
7.6.5
1
Vacuum the system until the pressure on the manifold indicates
−0.1 MPa (−1 bar).
2
Leave as is for 4-5 minutes and check the pressure:
If the pressure…
INFORMATION
Also read the precautions and requirements in the
following chapters:
▪ General safety precautions
▪ Preparation
NOTICE
Use a 2-stage vacuum pump with a non-return valve that
can evacuate to a gauge pressure of −⁠100.7 kPa
(−⁠1.007 bar)(5 Torr absolute). Make sure the pump oil
does not flow oppositely into the system while the pump is
not working.
NOTICE
To perform vacuum drying
Then…
Does not change
There is no moisture in the
system. This procedure is
finished.
Increases
There is moisture in the
system. Go to the next step.
3
Evacuate for at least 2 hours to a pressure on the manifold of
−0.1 MPa (−1 bar).
4
After turning OFF the pump, check the pressure for at least
1 hour.
5
If you do NOT reach the target vacuum or cannot maintain the
vacuum for 1 hour, do the following:
▪ Check for leaks again.
▪ Perform vacuum drying again.
Use this vacuum pump for R410A exclusively. Using the
same pump for other refrigerants may damage the pump
and the unit.
ERHQ+ERLQ011~016 + EHBH/X11+16CB
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P384974-1B – 2017.04
Installer reference guide
37
7 Installation
NOTICE
2 Charging refrigerant.
Make sure to open the stop valves after installing the
refrigerant piping and performing vacuum drying. Running
the system with the stop valves closed may break the
compressor.
3 Filling in the fluorinated greenhouse gases label, and fixing it to
the inside of the outdoor unit.
7.7.2
Precautions when charging refrigerant
INFORMATION
INFORMATION
After opening the stop valve, it is possible that the pressure
in the refrigerant piping does NOT increase. This might be
caused by e.g. the closed state of the expansion valve in
the outdoor unit circuit, but does NOT present any problem
for correct operation of the unit.
Also read the precautions and requirements in the
following chapters:
7.7
Charging refrigerant
7.7.1
About charging refrigerant
Charging additional refrigerant
▪ Preparation
7.7.3
The outdoor unit is factory charged with refrigerant, but in some
cases the following might be necessary:
What
▪ General safety precautions
When
To determine the additional refrigerant
amount
If the total liquid
piping length is…
Then…
≤10 m
Do NOT add additional refrigerant.
>10 m
R=(total length (m) of liquid
piping⁠–⁠10 m)×0.054
When the total liquid piping
length is more than specified
(see later).
R=Additional charge (kg)(rounded in units
of 0.1 kg)
Completely recharging refrigerant Example:
INFORMATION
▪ When relocating the system.
Piping length is the one way length of liquid piping.
▪ After a leak.
Charging additional refrigerant
7.7.4
Before charging additional refrigerant, make sure the outdoor unit's
external refrigerant piping is checked (leak test, vacuum drying).
INFORMATION
If a complete recharge is necessary, the total refrigerant
charge is: the factory refrigerant charge (see unit name
plate) + the determined additional amount.
INFORMATION
Depending on the units and/or the installation conditions, it
might be necessary to connect electrical wiring before you
can charge refrigerant.
Typical workflow – Charging additional refrigerant typically consists
of the following stages:
1 Determining if and how much you have to charge additionally.
2 If necessary, charging additional refrigerant.
7.7.5
7.7.6
▪ Only use R410A as refrigerant. Other substances may
cause explosions and accidents.
▪ R410A contains fluorinated greenhouse gases. Its
global warming potential (GWP) value is 2087.5. Do
NOT vent these gases into the atmosphere.
Before completely recharging refrigerant, make sure the following is
done:
1 All refrigerant is recovered from the system.
▪ When charging refrigerant, always use protective
gloves and safety glasses.
2 The outdoor unit's external refrigerant piping is checked (leak
test, vacuum drying).
CAUTION
3 Vacuum drying on the outdoor unit's internal refrigerant piping is
performed.
Typical workflow – Completely recharging refrigerant typically
consists of the following stages:
To charge additional refrigerant
WARNING
Completely recharging refrigerant
Before completely recharging, perform vacuum drying on
the outdoor unit's internal refrigerant piping as well. To do
so, use the internal service port of the outdoor unit
(between the heat exchanger and the 4‑way valve). Do
NOT use the service ports of the stop valves, because
vacuum drying cannot be performed properly from these
ports.
Charging refrigerant: Setup
See "7.6.3 Checking refrigerant piping: Setup" on page 37.
3 Filling in the fluorinated greenhouse gases label, and fixing it to
the inside of the outdoor unit.
NOTICE
To determine the complete recharge
amount
To avoid compressor breakdown, do NOT charge more
than the specified amount of refrigerant.
Prerequisite: Before charging refrigerant, make sure the refrigerant
piping is connected and checked (leak test and vacuum drying).
1
Connect the refrigerant cylinder to both the service port of the
gas stop valve and the service port of the liquid stop valve.
2
Charge the additional refrigerant amount.
3
Open the stop valves.
If pump down is needed in case of dismantling or relocating the
system, see "13.3 To pump down" on page 86 for more details.
1 Determining how much refrigerant to charge.
Installer reference guide
38
ERHQ+ERLQ011~016 + EHBH/X11+16CB
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P384974-1B – 2017.04
7 Installation
7.7.7
1
To fix the fluorinated greenhouse gases
label
Fill in the label as follows:
1
RXXX
1 =
kg
b
2 =
kg
c
1 + 2 =
kg
d
tCO2eq
e
GWP: XXX
2
1
GWP × kg
1000
a
b
c
d
e
f
=
If a multilingual fluorinated greenhouse gases label is
delivered with the unit (see accessories), peel off the
applicable language and stick it on top of a.
Factory refrigerant charge: see unit name plate
Additional refrigerant amount charged
Total refrigerant charge
Greenhouse gas emissions of the total refrigerant charge
expressed as tonnes CO2-equivalent
GWP = Global warming potential
b
a
a
b
Water inlet
Water outlet
NOTICE
NOTICE
In Europe, the greenhouse gas emissions of the total
refrigerant charge in the system (expressed as tonnes
CO2-equivalent) is used to determine the maintenance
intervals. Follow the applicable legislation.
To avoid damage to the surroundings in case of water
leakage, it is recommended to close the cold water inlet
shut‑off valves during periods of absence.
Formula to calculate the greenhouse gas emissions:
GWP value of the refrigerant × Total refrigerant charge [in
kg] / 1000
2
Install the shut-off valves on the water pipes.
a
Contains fluorinated greenhouse gases
f
the circuit on which they are located. To be able to only drain the
unit, make sure the drain valves are positioned between the shut‑off
valves and the unit.
2
Screw the indoor unit nuts on the shut-off valves.
3
Connect the field piping on the shut-off valves.
4
In case of connection with the optional domestic hot water tank,
see the installation manual of the domestic hot water tank.
Fix the label on the inside of the outdoor unit near the gas and
liquid stop valves.
NOTICE
Install air purge valves at all local high points.
7.8
Connecting the water piping
7.8.1
About connecting the water piping
NOTICE
▪ A drain device and pressure relief device should be
installed on the cold water inlet connection of the
domestic hot water cylinder.
Before connecting the water piping
▪ To avoid back siphonage, it is recommended to install a
non-return valve on the water inlet of the domestic hot
water tank in accordance with the applicable legislation.
Make sure the outdoor and indoor unit are mounted.
Typical workflow
Connecting the water piping typically consists of the following
stages:
1
2
3
4
▪ It is recommended to install a pressure reducing valve
on the cold water inlet in accordance with the
applicable legislation.
Connecting the water piping to the indoor unit.
Filling the water circuit.
Filling the domestic hot water tank.
Insulating the water piping.
7.8.2
▪ An expansion vessel should be installed on the cold
water inlet in accordance with the applicable legislation.
▪ It is recommended to install the pressure relief valve on
a higher position than the top of the domestic hot water
tank. Heating of the domestic hot water tank causes
water to expand and without pressure relief valve the
water pressure inside the tank can rise above the tank
design pressure. Also the field installation (piping,
tapping points, etc.) connected to the tank is subjected
to this high pressure. To prevent this, a pressure
relieve valve needs to be installed. The overpressure
prevention depends on the correct operation of the field
installed pressure relief valve. If this is NOT working
correctly, overpressure will deform the tank and water
leakage may occur. To confirm good operation, regular
maintenance is required.
Precautions when connecting the water
piping
INFORMATION
Also read the precautions and requirements in the
following chapters:
▪ General safety precautions
▪ Preparation
7.8.3
To connect the water piping
NOTICE
Do NOT use excessive force when connecting the piping.
Deformation of the piping can cause malfunctioning of the
unit.
7.8.4
1
To fill the water circuit
Connect the water supply hose to the drain and fill valve.
To facilitate service and maintenance, 2 shut-off valves are provided.
Mount the valves on the water inlet and on the water outlet. Mind
their position: the integrated drain valves will only drain the side of
ERHQ+ERLQ011~016 + EHBH/X11+16CB
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P384974-1B – 2017.04
Installer reference guide
39
7 Installation
Typical workflow
Connecting the electrical wiring typically consists of the following
stages:
1
Making sure the power supply system complies with the
electrical specifications of the heat pump.
2
Connecting the electrical wiring to the outdoor unit.
3
Repositioning the air thermistor on the outdoor unit.
2
Open the drain and fill valve.
3
Make sure that the automatic air purge valve is open (at least 2
turns).
4
Fill the circuit with water until the manometer indicates a
pressure of ±2.0 bar.
5
Purge as much air as possible from the water circuit. For
instructions, see "9 Commissioning" on page 77.
6
Close the drain and fill valve.
7
Disconnect the water supply hose from the drain and fill valve.
NOTICE
4
Connecting the electrical wiring to the indoor unit.
5
6
Connecting the main power supply.
Connecting the backup heater power supply.
7
Connecting the user interface.
8
9
Connecting the shut–off valves.
Connecting the electrical meters.
10
11
12
Connecting the domestic hot water pump.
Connecting the alarm output.
Connecting the space cooling/heating ON/OFF output.
13
14
15
Connecting the changeover to an external heat source.
Connecting the power consumption digital inputs.
Connecting the safety thermostat.
7.9.2
About electrical compliance
ERHQ_V3
The water pressure indicated on the manometer will vary
depending on the water temperature (higher pressure at
higher water temperature).
Equipment complying with EN/IEC 61000‑3‑12 (European/
International Technical Standard setting the limits for harmonic
currents produced by equipment connected to public low-voltage
systems with input current >16 A and ≤75 A per phase.).
However, at all times water pressure shall remain above
1 bar to avoid air entering the circuit.
ERLQ_V3
Equipment complying with:
7.8.5
To fill the domestic hot water tank
For installation instructions, see the installation manual of the
domestic hot water tank.
7.8.6
To insulate the water piping
The piping in the complete water circuit MUST be insulated to
prevent condensation during cooling operation and reduction of the
heating and cooling capacity.
If the temperature is higher than 30°C and the humidity is higher
than RH 80%, the thickness of the insulation materials should be at
least 20 mm to prevent condensation on the surface of the
insulation.
7.9
Connecting the electrical wiring
7.9.1
About connecting the electrical wiring
Before connecting the electrical wiring
Make sure:
▪ The refrigerant piping is connected and checked
▪ The water piping is connected
▪ EN/IEC 61000‑3‑11 provided that the system impedance Zsys is
less than or equal to Zmax at the interface point between the user's
supply and the public system.
▪ EN/IEC 61000‑3‑11 = European/International Technical
Standard setting the limits for voltage changes, voltage
fluctuations and flicker in public low-voltage supply systems for
equipment with rated current ≤75 A.
▪ It is the responsibility of the installer or user of the equipment to
ensure, by consultation with the distribution network operator if
necessary, that the equipment is connected only to a supply
with a system impedance Zsys less than or equal to Zmax.
▪ EN/IEC 61000‑3‑12 provided that the short-circuit power Ssc is
greater than or equal to the minimum Ssc value at the interface
point between the user's supply and the public system.
▪ EN/IEC 61000‑3‑12 = European/International Technical
Standard setting the limits for harmonic currents produced by
equipment connected to public low-voltage systems with input
current >16 A and ≤75 A per phase.
▪ It is the responsibility of the installer or user of the equipment to
ensure, by consultation with the distribution network operator if
necessary, that the equipment is connected only to a supply
with a short-circuit power Ssc greater than or equal to the
minimum Ssc value.
Model
ERLQ011CAV3
Zmax
Minimum Ssc
value
0.22 Ω
525 kVA
ERLQ014CAV3
ERLQ016CAV3
ERLQ_W1
Equipment complying with EN/IEC 61000‑3‑12 (European/
International Technical Standard setting the limits for harmonic
currents produced by equipment connected to public low-voltage
systems with input current >16 A and ≤75 A per phase.).
Installer reference guide
40
ERHQ+ERLQ011~016 + EHBH/X11+16CB
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P384974-1B – 2017.04
7 Installation
Only for indoor units
7.9.5
See "7.9.10 To connect the backup heater power supply" on
page 44.
Specifications of standard wiring
components
Component
7.9.3
Precautions when connecting the
electrical wiring
MCA(a)
Power supply
cable
INFORMATION
Also read the precautions and requirements in the
following chapters:
▪ General safety precautions
▪ Preparation
V3
ERHQ
ERLQ
ERHQ
ERLQ
31.9 A
34.2 A
13.5 A
16.3 A
Voltage
230 V
400 V
Phase
1~
3N~
Frequency
50 Hz
Wire sizes
Must comply with applicable
legislation
Interconnection cable
Minimum cable section of 2.5 mm²
and applicable for 230 V
DANGER: RISK OF ELECTROCUTION
32 A
Recommended field fuse
Earth leakage circuit breaker
WARNING
ALWAYS use multicore cable for power supply cables.
(a)
7.9.4
Guidelines when connecting the electrical
wiring
7.9.6
Keep the following in mind:
▪ If stranded conductor wires are being used, install a round crimpstyle terminal on the tip. Place the round crimp-style terminal on
the wire up to the covered part and fasten the terminal with the
appropriate tool.
W1
20 A
40 A
Must comply with applicable
legislation
MCA=Minimum circuit ampacity. Stated values are
maximum values (see electrical data of combination with
indoor units for exact values).
To connect the electrical wiring on the
outdoor unit
NOTICE
▪ Follow the wiring diagram (delivered with the unit,
located at the inside of the service cover).
▪ Make sure the electrical wiring does NOT obstruct
proper reattachment of the service cover.
b
a
a
b
Stranded conductor wire
Round crimp-style terminal
1
Remove the service cover. See "7.2.2 To open the outdoor
unit" on page 30.
2
Strip insulation (20 mm) from the wires.
a
▪ Use the following methods for installing wires:
b
Installation method
Wire type
cb
Single core wire
A
AA´
A´
a
b
c
a
a
3
Connect the interconnection cable and power supply as follows:
W1
3N~ 50 Hz
400 V
V3
1~ 50 Hz
230 V
a Curled single core wire
L1 L2 L3
b Screw
c
c Flat washer
Stranded conductor
wire with round
crimp-style terminal
Strip wire end to this point
Excessive strip length may cause electrical shock or
leakage.
cb
a
B
bc
d
b
B
a
L1 L2 L3
a
a Terminal
b Screw
c Flat washer
Tightening torques
Item
Tightening torque (N•m)
M4 (X1M)
1.2~1.8
M5 (X1M)
2.0~3.0
M5 (earth)
3.0~4.0
ERHQ+ERLQ011~016 + EHBH/X11+16CB
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P384974-1B – 2017.04
a
b
c
d
Interconnection cable
Power supply cable
Earth leakage circuit breaker
Fuse
Installer reference guide
41
7 Installation
Connecting to the
frame
a
When cables are routed from the unit, a
protection sleeve for the conduits (PG
insertions) can be inserted at the knockout
hole.
When you do not use a wire conduit,
protect the wires with vinyl tubes to
prevent the edge of the knockout hole from
cutting the wires.
b
A B
V3
c
g
W1
c
a
g
d
h
e
f
bc
d
e
A Inside of the outdoor unit
B Outside of the outdoor unit
a Wire
b Bush
c Nut
d Frame
e Hose
d
h
e
f
a
b
c
d
e
f
Switch box
Stop valve attachment plate
Earth
Cable tie
Interconnection cable
Power supply cable
Reattach the service cover. See "7.10.2 To close the outdoor
unit" on page 48.
7
Connect an earth leakage circuit breaker and fuse to the power
supply line.
7.9.7
Bottom plate heater cable
Power supply cable of the bottom plate heater (from the
indoor unit)
Required accessories:
Thermistor fixture.
Use the one from the accessory bag.
INFORMATION
Thermistor fixing plate.
ERLQ units control the bottom plate heater internally (field
wiring NOT required).
4
Fix the cables (power supply, interconnection cable and power
supply of the bottom plate heater (if applicable)) with a cable tie
to the stop valve attachment plate.
5
Route the wiring through the frame and connect it to it.
Routing through
the frame
To reposition the air thermistor on the
outdoor unit
This task is only required for ERLQ.
Only if bottom plate heater is installed (option for ERHQ):
g
h
6
Reuse the one attached to the unit. If necessary,
you can use the spare one from the accessory
bag.
3
2
Choose one of the 3 possibilities:
3
1
1
b
a
2
b
a
b
a
a Power supply, earth wiring, and bottom
plate heater wire (if applicable)
b Interconnection cable
Installer reference guide
42
4
5
ERHQ+ERLQ011~016 + EHBH/X11+16CB
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P384974-1B – 2017.04
7 Installation
7.9.8
7
8
7
6
To connect the electrical wiring on the
indoor unit
1
To open the indoor unit, see "7.2.3 To open the indoor unit" on
page 30.
2
Wiring should enter the unit from the bottom.
3
Routing of the wiring inside the unit should be as follows:
10
a
c
b
9
INFORMATION
11
When installing field supply or option cables, foresee
sufficient cable length. This will make it possible to remove/
reposition the switch box and gain access to other
components during service.
Routing
Possible cables (depending on unit type and installed options)
a
▪ Preferential power supply contact
Low voltage
▪ User interface
▪ Domestic hot water tank thermistor (option)
▪ Power consumption digital inputs (field supply)
▪ Outdoor ambient temperature sensor (option)
▪ Indoor ambient temperature sensor (option)
▪ Electrical meters (field supply)
▪ Safety thermostat (field supply)
b
▪ Interconnection cable
High voltage power supply ▪ Normal kWh rate power supply
▪ Preferential kWh rate power supply
▪ Power supply for backup heater
▪ Power supply for bottom plate heater (option)
▪ Power supply for booster heater (to indoor unit)
▪ Power supply for booster heater and thermal protection (from indoor unit)
c
▪ Heat pump convector (option)
High voltage control signal ▪ Room thermostat (option)
▪ 3-way valve
▪ Shut-off valve (field supply)
▪ Domestic hot water pump (field supply)
▪ Alarm output
▪ Changeover to external heat source control
▪ Space heat/cool operation control
4
Fix the cable with cable ties to the cable tie mountings to
ensure strain relief and to make sure that it does NOT come in
contact with the piping and sharp edges.
ERHQ+ERLQ011~016 + EHBH/X11+16CB
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P384974-1B – 2017.04
CAUTION
Do NOT push or place redundant cable length in the unit.
Installer reference guide
43
7 Installation
7.9.9
1
To connect the main power supply
7.9.10
Connect the main power supply.
CAUTION
In case of normal kWh rate power supply
X1A X19A
If the indoor unit has a tank with a built‑in electrical booster
heater (EKHW), use a dedicated power circuit for the
backup heater and booster heater. NEVER use a power
circuit shared by another appliance. This power circuit
must be protected with the required safety devices
according to the applicable legislation.
X5M
X6YB
X2M
To connect the backup heater power
supply
30 31
X6Y
X6YA
CAUTION
X1M
To guarantee the unit is completely earthed, always
connect the backup heater power supply and the earth
cable.
The backup heater capacity can vary, depending on the indoor unit
model. Make sure that the power supply is in accordance with the
backup heater capacity, as listed in the table below.
a
Backup
heater
capacity
Power
supply
Maximum
running
current
Zmax(Ω)
*3V
3 kW
1~ 230 V
13 A
—
*9W
Backup
heater type
123
123
Legend: see illustration below.
3 kW
1~ 230 V
13 A
—
In case of preferential kWh rate power supply
6 kW
1~ 230 V
26 A(a)(b)
—
Connect X6Y to X6YB.
6 kW
3~ 230 V
15 A
—
6 kW
3N~ 400 V
8.6 A
—
9 kW
3N~ 400 V
13 A
—
X1A
X5M
3 4
X19A
X6Y
X6YB
X2M
(a)
30 31
X6YA
(b)
X1M
c
b
S1S
a
b
c
2
a
LN
123
LN
123
Interconnection cable (=main power supply)
Normal kWh rate power supply
Preferential power supply contact
Fix the cable with cable ties to the cable tie mountings.
INFORMATION
In case of preferential kWh rate power supply, connect
X6Y to X6YB. The necessity of separate normal kWh rate
power supply to indoor unit (b) X2M30/31 depends on the
type of preferential kWh rate power supply.
Separate connection to the indoor unit is required:
Equipment complying with EN/IEC 61000-3-12 (European/
International Technical Standard setting the limits for
harmonic currents produced by equipment connected to
public low-voltage systems with input current >16 A and
≤75 A per phase.).
This equipment complies with EN/IEC 61000‑3‑11
(European/International Technical Standard setting the
limits for voltage changes, voltage fluctuations and flicker in
public low-voltage supply systems for equipment with rated
current ≤75 A) provided that the system impedance Zsys is
less than or equal to Zmax at the interface point between the
user's supply and the public system. It is the responsibility
of the installer or user of the equipment to ensure, by
consultation with the distribution network operator if
necessary, that the equipment is connected only to a
supply with a system impedance Zsys less than or equal to
Zmax.
1
Connect the backup heater power supply. For *3V models, a
double‑pole fuse is used for F1B. For *9W models, a 4‑pole
fuse is used for F1B.
2
If required, modify the connections on terminals X6M and X7M.
Backup heater
type
3 kW 1~ 230 V
(*3V)
Connections to
backup heater power
supply
F1B
Connections to
terminals
—
L N
▪ if preferential kWh rate power supply is interrupted
when active, OR
▪ if no power consumption of the indoor unit is allowed at
the preferential kWh rate power supply when active.
INFORMATION
The preferential kWh rate power supply contact is
connected to the same terminals (X5M/3+4) as the safety
thermostat. It is only possible for the system to have
EITHER preferential kWh rate power supply OR a safety
thermostat.
Installer reference guide
44
ERHQ+ERLQ011~016 + EHBH/X11+16CB
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P384974-1B – 2017.04
7 Installation
Backup heater
type
Connections to
backup heater power
supply
F1B
3 kW 1~ 230 V
(*9W)
L
X6M
1 2 3 4
X7M
5 6 7 8
X6M
1 2 3 4
X7M
5 6 7 8
X6M
1 2 3 4
X7M
5 6 7 8
N
6 kW 1~ 230 V
(*9W)
6 kW 3~ 230 V
(*9W)
Connections to
terminals
F1B
L1 L2 L3
6 kW 3N~ 400 V
(*9W)
9 kW 3N~ 400 V
(*9W)
F1B
X6M
1 2 3 4
X7M
5 6 7 8
L1 L2 L3
3
Fix the cable with cable ties to the cable tie mountings.
4
Configure the user interface for the respective power supply.
See "8.2.2 Quick wizard: Standard" on page 51.
During connection of the backup heater, miswiring is possible. To
detect possible miswiring, it is highly recommended to measure the
resistance value of the heater elements. Depending on the different
backup heater types, following resistance values (see table below)
should be measured. ALWAYS measure the resistance on the
contactor clamps K1M, K2M, and K5M.
K1M/1
K1M/3
K2M/1
6 kW
6 kW
6 kW
9 kW
1~
230 V
1~
230 V
3~
230 V
3N~
400 V
3N~
400 V
K5M/13 52.9Ω
K1M/3
Special remark for fuses:
3 kW
∞
52.9Ω
52.9Ω
∞
∞
∞
∞
105.8Ω
105.8Ω
K1M/5
∞
∞
∞
105.8Ω
105.8Ω
K1M/5
26.5Ω
26.5Ω
26.5Ω
105.8Ω
105.8Ω
K5M/13 ∞
26.5Ω
26.5Ω
∞
∞
K2M/3
∞
∞
∞
52.9Ω
52.9Ω
K2M/5
∞
∞
∞
52.9Ω
52.9Ω
K2M/3
K2M/5
52.9Ω
52.9Ω
52.9Ω
52.9Ω
52.9Ω
K1M/5
K2M/1
∞
∞
∞
∞
∞
Example measure resistance between K1M/1 and K5M/13:
Ω
Special remark for terminals:
As mentioned on the table above, the connections on the terminals
X6M and X7M need to be changed to configure a backup heater.
Refer to the illustration below as a caution about handling the
terminals.
Ω
K1M
K2M
1 3 5 13
1 3 5 13
2 4 6 14
2 4 6 14
K5M
1 3 5 13
2 4 6 14
7.9.11
To connect the user interface
▪ If you use 1 user interface, you can install it at the indoor unit (for
control close to the indoor unit), or in the room (when used as
room thermostat).
▪ If you use 2 user interfaces, you can install 1 user interface at the
indoor unit (for control close to the indoor unit) + 1 user interface
in the room (used as room thermostat).
ERHQ+ERLQ011~016 + EHBH/X11+16CB
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P384974-1B – 2017.04
Installer reference guide
45
7 Installation
The procedure differs slightly depending on where you install the
user interface.
#
1
At the indoor unit
4A From the rear
4B From the left
In the room
Connect the user interface cable to the indoor unit.
PCB
PCB
Fix the cable with cable ties to the cable tie mountings.
12
X5M
1×
a
b
X2M
1×
a
b
4C From the top
4D From the top centre
a
a
b
b
A2P
A2P
PCB
PCB
a
b
1×
1×
b
b
a Main user interface(a)
a
b Optional user interface
2
Insert a screwdriver into the slots underneath the user
interface and carefully separate the faceplate from the
wallplate.
The PCB is mounted in the faceplate of the user interface.
Be careful NOT to damage it.
b
7.9.12
1
Notch this part for the wiring to pass through with nippers
etc.
Secure the wiring to the front part of the casing using the
wiring retainer and clamp.
To connect the shut-off valve
Connect the valve control cable to the appropriate terminals as
shown in the illustration below.
NOTICE
3
Use the 2 screws in the accessory
bag to fix the wallplate of the user
interface to the sheet metal of the
unit.
Wiring is different for a NC (normal closed) valve and a NO
(normal open) valve.
Fix the wallplate of
the user interface to
the wall.
NO
5
X2M
Be careful NOT to distort the shape
of the backside of the user interface
by overtightening the mounting
screws.
67
X2M
X1M
Connect as shown in 4A.
Connect as shown
in 4A, 4B, 4C or 4D.
5
Reinstall the faceplate onto the wallplate.
2
In case of an electrical meter with transistor output, check
the polarity. The positive polarity MUST be connected to
X5M/7 and X5M/9; the negative polarity to X5M/8 and
X5M/10.
1
46
To connect the electrical meters
INFORMATION
The main user interface is required for operation, but has to
be ordered separately (mandatory option).
Installer reference guide
M2S
Fix the cable with cable ties to the cable tie mountings.
7.9.13
Be careful NOT to pinch the wiring when attaching the
frontplate to the unit.
(a)
567
X1M
M2S
4
NC
Connect the electrical meters cable to the appropriate terminals
as shown in the illustration below.
ERHQ+ERLQ011~016 + EHBH/X11+16CB
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P384974-1B – 2017.04
7 Installation
a
X5M
29
X2M
X1M
X1M
X2M
YC Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4
7 8 910
A4P
X2M
S2S S3S
2
Fix the cable with cable ties to the cable tie mountings.
7.9.14
a
To connect the domestic hot water pump
2
1
Connect the domestic hot water pump cable to the appropriate
terminals as shown in the illustration below.
34 35
X2M
Installation of EKRP1HB is required.
Fix the cable with cable ties to the cable tie mountings.
To connect the changeover to external
heat source
7.9.17
1
Connect the changeover to external heat source cable to the
appropriate terminals as shown in the illustration below.
a
X1M
X1M
A4P
X2M
X1 X2 X3 X4
M2P
2
Fix the cable with cable ties to the cable tie mountings.
7.9.15
1
M
1~
To connect the alarm output
Connect the alarm output cable to the appropriate terminals as
shown in the illustration below.
LN
a
2
a
29
X2M
7.9.18
YC Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4
1
X1M
X1M
A4P
Installation of EKRP1HB is required.
Fix the cable with cable ties to the cable tie mountings.
To connect the power consumption digital
inputs
Connect the power consumption digital inputs cable to the
appropriate terminals as shown in the illustration below.
a
X2M
X801M
1 23 4 5
X2M
A8P
X1M
a
7.9.16
1
Installation of EKRP1HB is required.
Fix the cable with cable ties to the cable tie mountings.
To connect the space cooling/heating ON/
OFF output
Connect the space cooling/heating ON/OFF output cable to the
appropriate terminals as shown in the illustration below.
S6S
S7S
S8S
S9S
2
a
2
7.9.19
1
ERHQ+ERLQ011~016 + EHBH/X11+16CB
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P384974-1B – 2017.04
Installation of EKRP1AHTA is required.
Fix the cable with cable ties to the cable tie mountings.
To connect the safety thermostat (normal
closed contact)
Connect the safety thermostat (normal closed) cable to the
appropriate terminals as shown in the illustration below.
Installer reference guide
47
7 Installation
7.10.2
X5M
3 4
To close the outdoor unit
NOTICE
When closing the outdoor unit cover, make sure that the
tightening torque does NOT exceed 4.1 N•m.
3
1
2
2
Fix the cable with cable ties to the cable tie mountings.
1×
NOTICE
Make sure to select and install the safety thermostat
according to the applicable legislation.
In any case, to prevent unnecessary tripping of the safety
thermostat, it is recommended that …
4
▪ … the safety thermostat is automatically resettable.
▪ … the safety thermostat has a maximum temperature
variation rate of 2°C/min.
7.11
▪ … there is a minimum distance of 2 m between the
safety thermostat and the motorised 3‑way valve
delivered with the domestic hot water tank.
Finishing the indoor unit
installation
7.11.1
To fix the user interface cover to the
indoor unit
INFORMATION
After it is installed, do NOT forget to configure the safety
thermostat. Without configuration, the indoor unit will
ignore the safety thermostat contact.
1
Make sure that the front panel is removed from the indoor unit.
See "7.2.3 To open the indoor unit" on page 30.
2
Plug the user interface cover into the hinges.
INFORMATION
The preferential kWh rate power supply contact is
connected to the same terminals (X5M/3+4) as the safety
thermostat. It is only possible for the system to have
EITHER preferential kWh rate power supply OR a safety
thermostat.
7.10
Finishing the outdoor unit
installation
7.10.1
To finish the outdoor unit installation
1
a
b
f
3
d
e
a
b
c
d
e
f
Gas pipe
Gas pipe insulation
Interconnection cable
Liquid pipe
Liquid pipe insulation
Finishing tape
Mount the front panel to the indoor unit.
7.11.2
To close the indoor unit
1
Close the switch box cover.
2
Reinstall the front panel.
NOTICE
When closing the indoor unit cover, make sure that the
tightening torque does NOT exceed 4.1 N•m.
Install the service cover.
Installer reference guide
48
3
Insulate and fix the refrigerant piping and interconnection cable
as follows:
c
2
2
ERHQ+ERLQ011~016 + EHBH/X11+16CB
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P384974-1B – 2017.04
8 Configuration
3
8
Configuration
8.1
Overview: Configuration
Pay special attention to the position of the plug!
H JST
This chapter describes what you have to do and know to configure
the system after it is installed.
2
3
Why
4
5
If you do NOT configure the system correctly, it might NOT work as
expected. The configuration influences the following:
▪ The calculations of the software
▪ What you can see on and do with the user interface
How
You can configure the system using two different methods.
Description
Method
Configuring via the
user interface
First time – Quick wizard. When you turn
ON the user interface for the first time (via
the indoor unit), a quick wizard starts to help
you configure the system.
Afterwards. If necessary, you can make
changes to the configuration afterwards.
Configuring via the
PC configurator
You can prepare the configuration off-site on
PC and afterwards upload the configuration
to the system with the PC configurator.
See also: "8.1.1 To connect the PC cable to
the switch box" on page 49.
INFORMATION
When the installer settings are changed, the user interface
will request to confirm. When confirmed, the screen will
shortly turn OFF and "busy" will be displayed for several
seconds.
To access the installer settings
1
Set the user permission level to Installer.
2
Go to [A]:
Method
Column in tables
Accessing settings via the breadcrumb in the
menu structure.
#
Accessing settings via the code in the
overview settings.
Code
1
Set the user permission level to Installer.
2
Go to [A.8]:
▪ "To access the installer settings" on page 49
▪ "8.5 Menu structure: Overview installer settings" on page 76
8.1.1
To connect the PC cable to the switch box
Prerequisite: The EKPCCAB kit is required.
> Installer settings > Overview settings.
To set the user permission level to Installer
1
Set the user permission level to Adv. end user.
2
Go to [6.4]:
3
Press
Result:
4
> Information > User permission level.
for more than 4 seconds.
is displayed on the home pages.
If you do NOT press any button for more than 1 hour or press
again for more than 4 seconds, the installer permission level
switches back to End user.
To set the user permission level to Advanced end user
1
Go to the main menu or any of its submenus:
2
Press
.
for more than 4 seconds.
Result: The user permission level switches to Adv. end user.
Additional information is displayed and "+" is added to the menu title.
The user permission level will stay in Adv. end user until set
otherwise.
To set the user permission level to End user
1
See also:
> Installer settings.
To access the overview settings
Accessing settings – Legend for tables
You can access the installer settings using two different methods.
However, NOT all settings are accessible via both methods. If so,
the corresponding table columns in this chapter are set to N/A (not
applicable).
To access the most used commands
8.1.2
Press
for more than 4 seconds.
Result: The user permission level switches to End user. The user
interface will return to the default home screen.
To modify an overview setting
Example: Modify [1‑01] from 15 to 20.
> Installer settings > Overview settings.
1
Go to [A.8]:
2
Go to the corresponding screen of the first part of the setting by
and
button.
using the
1
Connect the cable with USB connection to your PC.
2
Connect the plug of the cable to X10A on A1P of the switch box
of the indoor unit.
INFORMATION
A1P
An additional 0-digit is added to the first part of the setting
when you access the codes in the overview settings.
X10A
Example: [1‑01]: "1" will result in "01".
ERHQ+ERLQ011~016 + EHBH/X11+16CB
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P384974-1B – 2017.04
Installer reference guide
49
8 Configuration
INFORMATION
Overview settings
00 00 01
04
05
08
09
0c
0d
Confirm
3
01
15 02 00 03 00
06
07
0a
0b
0e
0f
Adjust
During the quick wizard, the second user interface displays
Busy and will NOT be possible to operate.
3
The quick wizard will guide you.
4
For proper operation of the system, the local data on the two
user interfaces must be the same. If this is NOT the case, both
user interfaces will display:
Scroll
Go to the corresponding second part of the setting by using the
and
button.
Overview settings
Synchronization
Data difference detected.
Please select action:
01
00 00 01 15 02 00 03 00
04
05
06
07
08
09
0a
0b
0c
0d
0e
0f
5
Modify the value by using the
and
button.
Overview settings
01
00 00 01 20 02 00 03 00
04
05
06
07
08
09
0a
0b
0c
0d
0e
0f
6
Scroll
Adjust
Confirm
5
Repeat previous steps if you have to modify other settings.
6
Push
7
At installer settings menu, press
Select the required action:
▪ Send data: the user interface you are operating contains the
correct data and the data on the other user interface will be
overwritten.
▪ Receive data: the user interface you are operating does
NOT contain the correct data and the data on the other user
interface will be used to overwrite.
Result: The value to be modified is now highlighted.
4
The user interface requests confirmation if you are sure to
proceed.
Start copy
Are you sure you want to
start the copy operation?
to confirm the modification of the parameter.
OK
OK
to confirm the settings.
Confirm
Installer settings
The system will restart.
Confirm
Adjust
Confirm
Scroll
Adjust
Confirm
Send data
7
Cancel
Adjust
Confirm the selection on the screen by pushing
and all data
(languages, schedules etc.) will be synchronised from the
selected source user interface to the other one.
Cancel
INFORMATION
Adjust
▪ During the copying, both controllers will NOT allow
operation.
Result: The system will restart.
▪ The copy operation can take up until 90 minutes.
8.1.3
To copy the system settings from the first
to the second user interface
If a second user interface is connected, the installer must first
proceed below instructions for the proper configuration of the 2 user
interfaces.
This procedure offers you also the possibility to copy the language
set from one user interface to the other one: e.g. from EKRUCBL2 to
EKRUCBL1.
1
When power is turned on for the first time, both user interfaces
display:
Tue 15:10
U5:Auto address
▪ It is recommended to change installer settings, or the
configuration of the unit, on the main user interface. If
not, it can take up to 5 minutes before these changes
are visible in the menu structure.
8
Your system is now set to be operated by the 2 user interfaces.
8.1.4
To copy the language set from the first to
the second user interface
See "8.1.3 To copy the system settings from the first to the second
user interface" on page 50.
8.1.5
Quick wizard: Set the system layout after
first power ON
After first power ON of the system, you are guided on the user
interface to do initial settings:
Push 4 sec. to continue
2
Push
for 4 seconds on the user interface on which you want
to proceed to the quick wizard. This user interface is now the
main user interface.
▪ language,
▪ date,
▪ time,
▪ system layout.
By confirming the system layout, you can proceed with the
installation and commissioning of the system.
Installer reference guide
50
ERHQ+ERLQ011~016 + EHBH/X11+16CB
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P384974-1B – 2017.04
8 Configuration
1
At power ON, the quick wizard starts as long as the system
layout was NOT confirmed yet, by setting the language.
8.2.2
Quick wizard: Standard
Backup heater configuration (only for *9W model)
Language
Select the desired language
The backup heater in a *9W model is adapted to be connected to
most common European electricity grids. Besides hardware
configuration, the grid type and the relay setting must be set on the
user interface.
#
Confirm
2
Adjust
[A.2.1.5]
Code
[5-0D]
Set the current date and time.
BUH type:
▪ 1 (1P,(1/1+2)): 6 kW 1~ 230 V (*9W)
▪ 3 (3P,(1/1+2)): 6 kW 3~ 230 V (*9W)
Date
What is the date today?
▪ 4 (3PN,(1/2)): 6 kW 3N~ 400 V (*9W)
▪ 5 (3PN,(1/1+2)): 9 kW 3N~ 400 V
(*9W)
Sun 1 Jan 2012
Confirm
Description
Adjust
Relay setting
Scroll
Relay setting
Time
What is the current time?
00 : 00
Backup heater operation
If backup heater
step 1 is active:
If backup heater
step 2 is active:
1/1+2
Relay 1 ON
Relays 1+2 ON
1/2
Relay 1 ON
Relay 2 ON
Space heating/cooling settings
Confirm
3
Scroll
Adjust
Set the system layout settings: Standard, Options, Capacities.
For more details, see "8.2 Basic configuration" on page 51.
A.2
System layout
Standard
Options
Capacities
Confirm layout
Select
4
#
1
[A.2.1.7]
Code
[C-07]
Description
Unit control method:
▪ 0 (LWT control): Unit operation is
decided based on the leaving water
temperature regardless the actual
room temperature and/or heating or
cooling demand of the room.
Scroll
After configuration, select Confirm layout and press
.
Confirm layout
Please confirm the system
layout. The system will
restart and will be ready for
first startup.
▪ 1 (Ext RT control): Unit operation is
decided by the external thermostat or
equivalent (e.g. heat pump convector).
▪ 2 (RT control): Unit operation is
decided based on the ambient
temperature of the user interface.
Cancel
OK
Confirm
5
The system can heat up or cool down a space. Depending on the
type of application, the space heating/cooling settings must be made
accordingly.
Adjust
The user interface re-initialises and you can proceed the
installation by setting the other applicable settings and
commissioning of the system.
When the installer settings are changed, the system will request to
confirm. When confirmation is complete, the screen will shortly turn
OFF and "busy" will be displayed for several seconds.
8.2
Basic configuration
8.2.1
Quick wizard: Language / time and date
#
Code
Description
[A.1]
N/A
Language
[1]
N/A
Time and date
ERHQ+ERLQ011~016 + EHBH/X11+16CB
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P384974-1B – 2017.04
Installer reference guide
51
8 Configuration
#
[A.2.1.B]
Code
N/A
#
Description
Only if there are 2 user interfaces (1
installed in the room, 1 installed at the
indoor unit):
a
[A.2.1.8]
Code
[7-02]
Description
<< continuation
▪ 1 (2 LWT zones): 2 leaving water
temperature zones. The zone with the
lowest leaving water temperature (in
heating) is called the main leaving
water temperature zone. The zone
with the highest leaving water
temperature (in heating) is called the
additional leaving water temperature
zone. In practice, the main leaving
water temperature zone consists of
the higher load heat emitters and a
mixing station is installed to achieve
the desired leaving water temperature.
b
a
▪ a: At unit
▪ b: In room as room thermostat
User interface location:
▪ At unit: the other user interface is
automatically set to In room and if RT
control is selected act as room
thermostat.
▪ In room (default): the other user
interface is automatically set to At unit
and if RT control is selected to act as
room thermostat.
b
▪ a: Add LWT zone
▪ b: Main LWT zone
#
[A.2.1.8]
Code
[7-02]
Description
The system can supply leaving water to
up to 2 water temperature zones. During
configuration, the number of water zones
must be set.
Number of LWT zones:
▪ 0 (1 LWT zone)(default): Only 1
leaving water temperature zone. This
zone is called the main leaving water
temperature zone.
#
[A.2.1.9]
Code
[F-0D]
Description
When the space heating/cooling control
is OFF by the user interface, the pump is
always OFF. When the space heating/
cooling control is On, you can select the
desired pump operation mode (only
applicable during space heating/cooling)
Pump operation mode:
▪ 0 (Continuous): Continuous pump
operation, regardless of thermo ON or
OFF condition. Remark: continuous
pump operation requires more energy
than sample or request pump
operation.
a
b
c
b
a
▪ a: Main LWT zone
continued >>
c
d
▪ a: Space heating/cooling control
(user interface)
▪ b: OFF
▪ c: On
▪ d: Pump operation
continued >>
Installer reference guide
52
ERHQ+ERLQ011~016 + EHBH/X11+16CB
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P384974-1B – 2017.04
8 Configuration
#
[A.2.1.9]
Code
[F-0D]
Following settings must be made accordingly.
Description
<< continuation
#
▪ 1 (Sample)(default): The pump is ON
when there is heating or cooling
demand as the leaving water
temperature has not reached the
desired temperature yet. When thermo
OFF condition occurs, the pump runs
every 5 minutes to check the water
temperature and demand heating or
cooling if necessary. Remark: Sample
is NOT available in external room
thermostat control or room thermostat
control.
a
c
b
e
d
Code
[A.2.2.1]
[E-05]
Can the system prepare domestic hot
water?
▪ 0 (No): NOT installed. Default for
EHBH/X.
▪ 1 (Yes): Installed. Default for EHVH/X.
Remark: For EHVH/X, the domestic
hot water tank is by default installed.
Do NOT change this setting.
[A.2.2.3]
[E-07]
f
▪ 1 (Type 2): Default for EHVH/X. The
backup heater will also be used for
domestic hot water heating.
▪ b: OFF
▪ c: On
Range: 0~6. However, values 2~6 are
not applicable for this setting. If the
setting is set to 6, an error code will
appear and the system will NOT operate.
▪ d: LWT temperature
▪ e: Actual
▪ f: Desired
[A.2.2.A]
[D-02]
▪ g: Pump operation
continued >>
Code
[F-0D]
Description
<< continuation
e
b
c
▪ 0 (No)(default): NOT installed.
▪ 1 (Secondary rtrn): Installed for instant
hot water when water is tapped. The
end-user sets the operation timing
(weekly schedule time) of the
domestic hot water pump when it
should run. Control of this pump is
possible through the indoor unit.
▪ 2 (Disinf. shunt): Installed for
disinfection. It runs when the
disinfection function of the domestic
hot water tank is running. No further
settings are needed.
b
c
▪ a: Space heating/cooling control
(user interface)
See also illustrations below.
Domestic hot water pump installed for…
▪ b: OFF
▪ c: On
▪ d: Heating demand (by ext RT or
RT)
▪ e: Pump operation
8.2.3
The indoor unit offers the possibility to
connect a field supplied domestic hot
water pump (On/OFF type). Depending
on the installation and configuration on
the user interface, we distinguish its
functionality.
DHW pump:
▪ 2 (Request): Pump operation based
on request. Example: Using a room
thermostat creates thermo ON/OFF
condition. When there is no such
demand, the pump is OFF. Remark:
Request is NOT available in leaving
water temperature control.
a
b
c
d
During domestic hot water preparation,
the heat pump can be assisted by an
electrical heater to ensure the domestic
hot water preparation even for high
desired tank temperatures.
▪ 0 (Type 1): Tank with booster heater
installed at the side of the tank.
Default for EHBH/X.
c
▪ a: Space heating/cooling control
(user interface)
#
DHW operation:
DHW tank type:
g
b
[A.2.1.9]
Description
Quick wizard: Options
Domestic hot water settings
This chapter only applies to systems with a domestic hot water tank
installed:
▪ EHBH/X: an optional domestic hot water tank is available,
Instant hot water
Disinfection
c
a
f
b
g
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
c
a
b
d
f
e
g
Indoor unit
Tank
Domestic hot water pump (field supply)
Heater element (field supply)
Non‑return valve (field supply)
Shower (field supply)
Cold water
▪ EHVH/X: a domestic hot water tank is standard incorporated into
the indoor unit.
ERHQ+ERLQ011~016 + EHBH/X11+16CB
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P384974-1B – 2017.04
Installer reference guide
53
8 Configuration
INFORMATION
#
The correct domestic hot water default settings becomes
only applicable when domestic hot water operation is
activated ([E‑05]=1).
[A.2.2.B]
Code
[C-08]
When an optional external ambient
sensor is connected, the type of the
sensor must be set. See "5 Application
guidelines" on page 11.
Thermostats and external sensors
NOTICE
▪ 0 (No)(default): NOT installed. The
thermistor in the user interface and in
the outdoor unit are used for
measurement.
If an external room thermostat is used, the external room
thermostat will control the room frost protection. However,
the room frost protection is only possible if the leaving
water temperature control on the unit's user interface is
turned ON.
▪ 1 (Outdoor sensor): Installed. The
outdoor sensor will be used to
measure
the
outdoor
ambient
temperature. Remark: For some
functionality, the temperature sensor
in the outdoor unit is still used.
See "5 Application guidelines" on page 11.
#
[A.2.2.4]
Code
[C-05]
Description
Contact type main
In external room thermostat control, the
contact type of the optional room
thermostat or heat pump convector for
the main leaving water temperature zone
must be set. See "5 Application
guidelines" on page 11.
▪ 1 (Thermo ON/OFF): The connected
external room thermostat or heat
pump convector sends the heating or
cooling demand by the same signal as
it is connected to only 1 digital input
(preserved for the main leaving water
temperature zone) on the indoor unit
(X2M/1). Select this value in case of a
connection to the heat pump
convector (FWXV).
▪ 2 (Room sensor): Installed. The
temperature sensor in the user
interface is NOT used anymore.
Remark: This value has only meaning
in room thermostat control.
Digital I/O PCB
Modification of these settings is only needed when the optional
digital I/O PCB is installed. The digital I/O PCB has multiple
functionality which need to be configured. See "5 Application
guidelines" on page 11.
#
[A.2.2.6.1]
Code
[C-02]
[C-06]
Contact type add.
In external room thermostat control with
2 leaving water temperature zones, the
type of the optional room thermostat for
the additional leaving water temperature
zone must be set. See "5 Application
guidelines" on page 11.
▪ 1 (Thermo ON/OFF): See Contact
type main. Connected on the indoor
unit (X2M/1a).
▪ 2 (H/C request)(default): See Contact
type main. Connected on the indoor
unit (X2M/1a and 2a).
Installer reference guide
54
Description
Ext. backup heat src
Indicates if the space heating is also
performed by means of another heat
source than the system.
▪ 2
(H/C
request)(default):
The
connected external room thermostat
sends separate heating and cooling
demand and is therefore connected to
the 2 digital input (preserved for the
main leaving water temperature zone)
on the indoor unit (X2M/1 and 2).
Select this value in case of connection
with the wired (EKRTWA) or wireless
(EKRTR1) room thermostat.
[A.2.2.5]
Description
External sensor
▪ 0 (No)(default): NOT installed.
▪ 1 (Bivalent): Installed. The auxiliary
boiler (gasboiler, oil burner) will
operate when the outdoor ambient
temperature is low. During the bivalent
operation, the heat pump is turned
OFF. Set this value in case an
auxililary boiler is used. See
"5 Application guidelines" on page 11.
[A.2.2.6.2]
[D-07]
Solar kit
Only applicable for EHBH/X. Indicates if
the domestic hot water tank is also
heated by thermal solar panels.
▪ 0 (No)(default): NOT installed.
▪ 1 (Yes): Installed. The domestic hot
water tank can –besides by the heat
pump– also be heated by thermal
solar panels. Set this value if thermal
solar panels are installed. See
"5 Application guidelines" on page 11.
ERHQ+ERLQ011~016 + EHBH/X11+16CB
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P384974-1B – 2017.04
8 Configuration
#
[A.2.2.6.3]
Code
[C-09]
Description
Alarm output
#
[A.2.2.8]
Code
[D‑08]
▪ 0 (No): NOT installed
Indicates the logic of the alarm output on
the digital I/O PCB during
malfunctioning.
▪ 0 (Normally open): The alarm output
will be powered when an alarm
occurs. By setting this value, a
distinction is made between the
detection of an alarm, and the
detection of a power failure.
▪ 1: Installed (0.1 pulse/kWh)
▪ 2: Installed (1 pulse/kWh)
▪ 3: Installed (10 pulse/kWh)
▪ 4: Installed (100 pulse/kWh)
▪ 5: Installed (1000 pulse/kWh)
[A.2.2.9]
[D‑09]
▪ 1 (Normally closed): The alarm output
will NOT be powered when an alarm
occurs.
[F-04]
▪ 1: Installed (0.1 pulse/kWh)
▪ 2: Installed (1 pulse/kWh)
▪ 3: Installed (10 pulse/kWh)
Bottom plate heater
▪ 4: Installed (100 pulse/kWh)
Only applicable for EHBH/X11+16 and
EHVH/X11+16. Indicates if an optional
bottom plate heater is installed on the
outdoor unit. The power of the bottom
plate heater is in this case supplied by
the indoor unit.
▪ 5: Installed (1000 pulse/kWh)
▪ 0 (No)(default): NOT installed.
▪ 1 (Yes): Installed. Remark: If this
value is set, the output on the digital I/
O PCB cannot be used for space
heating/cooling
output.
See
"5 Application guidelines" on page 11.
8.2.4
Quick wizard: Capacities (energy
metering)
The capacities of all electrical heaters must be set for the energy
metering and/or power consumption control feature to work properly.
When measuring the resistance value of each heater, you can set
the exact heater capacity and this will lead to more accurate energy
data.
#
[A.2.3.1]
Code
[6-02]
Alarm output logic
[C-09]
Alarm
No alarm
0 (default)
Closed output
Open output
1
Open output
Closed output
No power
supply to unit
▪ EHBH/X: default 3 kW
▪ EHVH/X: default 0 kW
[A.2.3.2]
[6-03]
[A.2.3.3]
[6-04]
The demand PCB is used to enable the power consumption control
by digital inputs. See "5 Application guidelines" on page 11.
[A.2.2.7]
Code
[D-04]
Description
Booster heater: Only applies to domestic
hot water tanks with an internal booster
heater (EKHW). The capacity of the
booster heater at nominal voltage.
Range: 0~10 kW (in steps of 0.2 kW):
Open output
Demand PCB
#
Optional external kWh meter 2:
▪ 0 (No): NOT installed
See also table below (Alarm output
logic).
[A.2.2.6.4]
Description
Optional external kWh meter 1:
BUH: step 1: The capacity of the first
step of the backup heater at nominal
voltage. Default: 3 kW.
Range: 0~10 kW (in steps of 0.2 kW)
Description
▪ 0 (No)(default)
BUH: step 2: Only applies to a two-step
backup heater (*9W). The capacity
difference between the second and first
step of the backup heater at nominal
voltage. Nominal value depends on the
backup heater configuration:
▪ 1 (Pwr consmp ctrl)
▪ 3 kW, 1N~ 230 V: 0 kW
Demand PCB
Only applicable for EHBH/X04+08 and
EHVH/X04+08. Indicates if the optional
demand PCB is installed.
▪ 6 kW, 1N~ 230 V: 3 kW (6 kW-3 kW)
Energy metering
▪ 6 kW, 3~ 230 V: 3 kW (6 kW-3 kW)
When energy metering is performed by the use of external power
meters, configure the settings as described below. Select the pulse
frequency output of each power meter in accordance with the power
meter specifications. It is possible to connect (up to 2) power meters
with different pulse frequencies. When only 1 or no power meter is
used, select No to indicate the corresponding pulse input is NOT
used.
▪ 6 kW, 3N~ 400 V: 3 kW (6 kW-3 kW)
▪ 9 kW, 3N~ 400 V: 6 kW (9 kW-3 kW)
Range: 0~10 kW (in steps of 0.2 kW):
▪ *3V: default 0 kW
▪ *9W: default 6 kW
[A.2.3.6]
[6-07]
Bottom plate heater: Only applies to an
optional bottom plate heater
(EKBPHTH16A). The capacity of the
optional bottom plate heater at nominal
voltage. Default: 0 W.
Range: 0~200 W (in steps of 10 W)
ERHQ+ERLQ011~016 + EHBH/X11+16CB
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P384974-1B – 2017.04
Installer reference guide
55
8 Configuration
8.2.5
Space heating/cooling control
#
The basic required settings in order to configure the space heating/
cooling of your system are described in this chapter. The weatherdependent installer settings define the parameters for the weatherdependent operation of the unit. When weather-dependent operation
is active, the water temperature is determined automatically
depending on the outdoor temperature. Low outdoor temperatures
will result in warmer water and vice versa. During weatherdependent operation, the user has the possibility to shift up or down
the target water temperature by a maximum of 5°C.
[7.7.1.1]
Code
[1-00]
[1-01]
[1-03]
[A.3.1.1.1]
N/A
[1-00]
continued >>
LWT setpoint mode:
#
leaving
water
[7.7.1.1]
<< continuation
[1-01]
▪ [1-00]:
Low
outdoor
ambient
temperature. −40°C~+5°C (default:
−10°C)
[1-02]
[1-03]
▪ Weather dep.: The desired leaving
water temperature is:
▪ fixed in time (i.e., NOT scheduled)
continued >>
Description
<< continuation
▪ NOT weather-dependent (i.e.,
does NOT depend on the outdoor
ambient temperature)
Remark: This value can only be
set in leaving water temperature
control.
▪ WD/scheduled: The desired leaving
water temperature is:
▪ weather-dependent (i.e., does
depend on the outdoor ambient
temperature)
▪ according
a
schedule.
The
scheduled actions consists of
desired
leaving
water
temperatures either preset or
custom.
Remark: This value can only be
set in leaving water temperature
control.
Installer reference guide
56
ambient
(default:
▪ [1-03]:
Desired
leaving
water
temperature when the outdoor
temperature equals or rises above
the high ambient temperature.
[9‑01]°C~min(45, [9‑00])°C (default:
25°C).
Note: This value should be lower
than [1-02] as for high outdoor
temperatures less warm water is
required.
▪ Fixed/scheduled: The desired leaving
water temperature is:
▪ according
a
schedule.
The
scheduled actions consists of
desired shift actions, either preset
or custom.
▪ [1-01]:
High
outdoor
temperature. 10°C~25°C
15°C)
▪ [1-02]:
Desired
leaving
water
temperature when the outdoor
temperature equals or drops below
the low ambient temperature.
[9‑01]°C~[9‑00]°C (default: 35°C).
Note: This value should be higher
than [1-03] as for low outdoor
temperatures warmer water is
required.
▪ weather-dependent (i.e. depends
on
the
outdoor
ambient
temperature)
Code
Description
Code
[1-00]
▪ fixed in time (i.e., NOT scheduled)
N/A
Ta
▪ Ta: Outdoor temperature
▪ NOT weather-dependent (i.e. does
NOT depend on the outdoor
ambient temperature)
#
[1-01]
▪ Tt: Target leaving water temperature
(main)
Description
▪ Fixed (default)
The
desired
temperature is:
[A.3.1.1.1]
[1-02]
[1-03]
Leaving water temperature: Main zone
Code
Tt
[1-02]
See the user reference guide and/or operation manual for more
details about this function.
#
Description
Set weather-dependent heating:
#
[7.7.1.2]
Code
[1-06]
[1-07]
Description
Set weather-dependent cooling:
Tt
[1‑08]
[1-09]
[1-08]
[1-09]
[1-06]
[1-07]
Ta
▪ Tt: Target leaving water temperature
(main)
▪ Ta: Outdoor temperature
continued >>
ERHQ+ERLQ011~016 + EHBH/X11+16CB
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P384974-1B – 2017.04
8 Configuration
#
[7.7.1.2]
Code
Description
#
[1-06]
<< continuation
[1-07]
▪ [1-06]:
Low
outdoor
temperature. 10°C~25°C
20°C)
ambient
(default:
▪ [1-07]:
High
outdoor
temperature. 25°C~43°C
35°C)
ambient
(default:
[1‑08]
[1-09]
[7.7.2.1]
▪ [1-08]:
Desired
leaving
water
temperature when the outdoor
temperature equals or drops below
the low ambient temperature.
[9‑03]°C~[9‑02]°C (default: 22°C).
Note: This value should be higher
than [1-09] as for low outdoor
temperatures
less
cold
water
suffices.
▪ [1-09]:
Desired
leaving
water
temperature when the outdoor
temperature equals or rises above
the high ambient temperature.
[9‑03]°C~[9‑02]°C (default: 18°C).
Note: This value should be lower
than [1-08] as for high outdoor
temperatures
colder
water
is
required.
Code
[0-00]
[0-01]
[0-03]
Code
N/A
[0-03]
continued >>
#
[7.7.2.1]
<< continuation
[0-01]
▪ [0-03]:
Low
outdoor
ambient
temperature. −40°C~+5°C (default:
−10°C)
[0-02]
[0-03]
▪ fixed in time (i.e., NOT scheduled)
▪ weather-dependent (i.e. depends
on
the
outdoor
ambient
temperature)
▪ WD/scheduled: The desired leaving
water temperature is:
▪ weather-dependent (i.e., does
depend on the outdoor ambient
temperature)
ambient
(default:
▪ [0-00]:
Desired
leaving
water
temperature when the outdoor
temperature equals or rises above
the high ambient temperature.
[9‑05]°C~min(45, [9‑06])°C (default:
35°C).
Note: This value should be lower
than [0-01] as for high outdoor
temperatures less warm water is
required.
▪ Weather dep.: The desired leaving
water temperature is:
Remark: This value can only be
set in leaving water temperature
control.
▪ [0-02]:
High
outdoor
temperature. 10°C~25°C
15°C)
▪ [0-01]:
Desired
leaving
water
temperature when the outdoor
temperature equals or drops below
the low ambient temperature.
[9‑05]°C~[9‑06]°C (default: 45°C).
Note: This value should be higher
than [0-00] as for low outdoor
temperatures warmer water is
required.
▪ NOT weather-dependent (i.e. does
NOT depend on the outdoor
ambient temperature)
▪ according
a
schedule.
The
scheduled actions are On or OFF.
Description
Code
[0-00]
▪ Fixed (default): The desired leaving
water temperature is:
▪ NOT weather-dependent (i.e.,
does NOT depend on the outdoor
ambient temperature)
Ta
▪ Ta: Outdoor temperature
Description
▪ fixed in time (i.e., NOT scheduled)
[0-02]
▪ Tt: Target leaving water temperature
(additional)
LWT setpoint mode:
▪ Fixed/scheduled: The desired leaving
water temperature is:
[0-01]
[0-00]
Only applicable if 2 leaving water temperature zones are present.
#
Tt
[0-02]
Leaving water temperature: Additional zone
[A.3.1.2.1]
Description
Set weather-dependent heating:
#
[7.7.2.2]
Code
[0-04]
[0-05]
Description
Set weather-dependent cooling:
Tt
[0-06]
[0-07]
[0-05]
[0-04]
[0-07]
[0-06]
Ta
▪ Tt: Target leaving water temperature
(additional)
▪ Ta: Outdoor temperature
continued >>
▪ according
a
schedule.
The
scheduled actions are On or OFF.
Remark: This value can only be
set in leaving water temperature
control.
ERHQ+ERLQ011~016 + EHBH/X11+16CB
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P384974-1B – 2017.04
Installer reference guide
57
8 Configuration
#
[7.7.2.2]
Code
▪ water temperatures as low as possible to match the desired
temperature (higher efficiency)
Description
[0-04]
<< continuation
[0-05]
▪ [0-07]:
Low
outdoor
temperature. 10°C~25°C
20°C)
ambient
(default:
▪ [0-06]:
High
outdoor
temperature. 25°C~43°C
35°C)
ambient
(default:
[0-06]
[0-07]
#
Code
[A.3.1.1.5]
[8-05]
▪ No (default): disabled.
Note: The desired leaving water
temperature needs to be set on the
user interface.
▪ [0-05]:
Desired
leaving
water
temperature when the outdoor
temperature equals or drops below
the low ambient temperature.
[9‑07]°C~[9‑08]°C (default: 12°C).
Note: This value should be higher
than [0‑04] as for low outdoor
temperatures
less
cold
water
suffices.
▪ [0-04]:
Desired
leaving
water
temperature when the outdoor
temperature equals or rises above
the high ambient temperature.
[9‑07]°C~[9‑08]°C (default: 8°C).
Note: This value should be lower
than [0‑05] as for high outdoor
temperatures
colder
water
is
required.
▪ Yes: enabled. The leaving water
temperature is calculated according
to the difference between the desired
and the actual room temperature.
This creates a better match between
the capacity of the heat pump and
the actual required capacity, and
results in less start/stop cycles and a
more economic operation.
Note: The desired leaving water
temperature can only be read out on
the user interface
[8-06]
N/A
Requires modulation to be enabled.
This is the value by which the desired
leaving water temperature is increased
or lowered.
Temperature difference for entering and leaving water. The unit is
designed to support under floor loops operation. The recommended
leaving water temperature (set by the user interface) for under floor
loops is 35°C. In such case, the unit will be controlled to realize a
temperature difference of 5°C which means that the entering water
to the unit is around 30°C. Depending on the installed application
(radiators, heat pump convector, under floor loops) or situation, it
can be possible to change the difference between entering and
leaving water temperature. Note that the pump will regulate its flow
to keep the Δt.
#
[A.3.1.3.2]
Code
[9-09]
[9-0A]
INFORMATION
When leaving water temperature modulation is enabled,
the weather‑dependent curve needs to be set to a higher
position than [8-06] plus the minimum leaving water
temperature setpoint required to reach a stable condition
on the comfort setpoint for the room. To increase
efficiency, modulation can lower the leaving water setpoint.
By setting the weather‑dependent curve to a higher
position, it cannot drop below the minimum setpoint. Refer
to the illustration below.
Description
Heating: required temperature
difference between entering and
leaving water. Range: 3°C~10°C (in
steps of 1°C; default value: 5°C).
Leaving water temperature maximum
modulation:
0°C~10°C (default: 3°C)
Leaving water temperature: Delta T source
[A.3.1.3.1]
Description
Modulated LWT:
Tt
+[8-06]
−[8-06]
Cooling: required temperature
difference between entering and
leaving water. Range: 3°C~10°C (in
steps of 1°C; default value: 5°C).
b
Ta
Leaving water temperature: Modulation
Only applicable in case of room thermostat control. When using the
room thermostat functionality, the customer needs to set the desired
room temperature. The unit will supply hot water to the heat emitters
and the room will be heated. Additionally, also the desired leaving
water temperature must be configured: when turning on the
modulation, the desired leaving water temperature will be calculated
automatically by the unit (based on the preset temperatures, if
weather-dependent is selected, modulation will be done based on
the desired weather-dependent temperatures); when turning off the
modulation, you can set the desired leaving water temperature on
the user interface. Moreover, with the modulation turned on, the
desired leaving water temperature is lowered or raised in function of
the desired room temperature and the difference between the actual
and the desired room temperature. This results in:
▪ stable room temperatures exactly
temperature (higher comfort level)
a
matching
the
desired
a
b
Weather-dependent curve
Minimum leaving water temperature setpoint required to
reach a stable condition on the comfort setpoint for the
room.
Leaving water temperature: Emitter type
Only applicable in case of room thermostat control. Depending on
the system water volume and the heat emitters type, the heat up or
cool down of a space can take longer. This setting can compensate
for a slow or a quick heating/cooling system during the heat up/cool
down cycle.
Note: The setting of the emitter type will influence the maximum
modulation of the desired leaving water temperature and the
possibility for usage of the automatic cooling/heating changeover
based on the indoor ambient temperature.
Therefore it is important to set this correctly.
▪ less On/OFF cycles (lower noise level, higher comfort and higher
efficiency)
Installer reference guide
58
ERHQ+ERLQ011~016 + EHBH/X11+16CB
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P384974-1B – 2017.04
8 Configuration
#
[A.3.1.1.7]
Code
[9-0B]
Description
Emitter type:
#
Code
[A.4.5]
[6-0E]
Reaction time of the system:
The maximum temperature that users
can select for the domestic hot water.
You can use this setting to limit the
temperature at the hot water taps.
▪ Quick Example: Small water volume
and fan coils.
▪ Slow Example: Large water volume,
floor heating loops.
8.2.6
Description
Maximum setpoint
If
▪ [E-07]≠1: 40°C~80°C (default: 60°C)
(for EHBH/X in combination with
EKHW)
Domestic hot water control
Only applicable in case an optional domestic hot water tank is
installed.
▪ [E-07]=1: 40°C~60°C (default: 60°C)
(only for EHVH/X)
Configuring the desired tank temperature
The maximum temperature is NOT
applicable during disinfection function.
See disinfection function.
The domestic hot water can be prepared in 3 different ways. They
differ from each other by the way the desired tank temperature is set
and how the unit acts upon it.
#
[A.4.1]
Code
[6-0D]
Description
8.2.7
Domestic hot water Type:
▪ 0 (Reheat only): Only reheat operation
is allowed.
▪ 1 (Reheat + sched.): The domestic hot
water tank is heated according to a
schedule and between the scheduled
heatup cycles, reheat operation is
allowed.
▪ 2 (Scheduled only): The domestic hot
water tank can ONLY be heated
according to a schedule.
See "8.3.2 Domestic hot water control: advanced" on page 64 for
more details.
INFORMATION
There is a risk of space heating (cooling) capacity
shortage/comfort problem (in case of frequent domestic hot
water operation, frequent and long space heating/cooling
interruption will happen) when selecting [6‑0D]=0 ([A.4.1]
Domestic hot water Type=Reheat only) in case of a
domestic hot water tank without an internal booster heater.
Maximum DHW temperature setpoint
The maximum temperature that users can select for the domestic
hot water. You can use this setting to limit the temperatures at the
hot water taps.
Contact/helpdesk number
#
Code
[6.3.2]
N/A
Description
Number that users can call in case of
problems.
8.3
Advanced configuration/
optimization
8.3.1
Space heating/cooling operation:
advanced
Preset leaving water temperature
You can define preset leaving water temperatures:
▪ economic (denotes the desired leaving water temperature which
results in the lowest energy consumption)
▪ comfort (denotes the desired leaving water temperature which
results in the highest energy consumption).
Preset values make it easy to use the same value in the schedule or
to adjust the desired leaving water temperature according to the
room temperature (see modulation). If you later want to change the
value, you ONLY have to do it in one place. Depending on whether
the desired leaving water temperature is weather dependent or NOT,
the desired shift values or the absolute desired leaving water
temperature should be specified.
NOTICE
The preset leaving water temperatures are ONLY
applicable for the main zone, as the schedule for the
additional zone consists of On/OFF actions.
INFORMATION
During disinfection of the domestic hot water tank, the
DHW temperature can exceed this maximum temperature.
NOTICE
INFORMATION
Select preset leaving water temperatures in accordance
with the design and selected heat emitters to ensure the
balance between desired room and leaving water
temperatures.
Limit the maximum hot water temperature according to the
applicable legislation.
#
Code
Description
Preset leaving water temperature for the main leaving water
temperature zone in case of NOT weather dependent
[7.4.2.1]
[8-09]
[7.4.2.2]
[8-0A]
[7.4.2.3]
[8-07]
Comfort (heating)
[9‑01]°C~[9‑00]°C (default: 35°C)
Eco (heating)
[9‑01]°C~[9‑00]°C (default: 33°C)
Comfort (cooling)
[9‑03]°C~[9‑02]°C (default: 18°C)
ERHQ+ERLQ011~016 + EHBH/X11+16CB
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P384974-1B – 2017.04
Installer reference guide
59
8 Configuration
#
Code
[7.4.2.4]
[8-08]
#
Description
Code
Description
[A.3.1.1.2.2] [9-00]
Eco (cooling)
Maximum temp (heating)
37°C~depending on outdoor unit
(default: 55°C)
[9‑03]°C~[9‑02]°C (default: 20°C)
Preset leaving water temperature (shift value) for the main leaving
water temperature zone in case of weather dependent
[7.4.2.5]
N/A
–10°C~+10°C (default: 0°C)
[7.4.2.6]
N/A
N/A
[7.4.2.8]
N/A
Minimum temp (heating)
15°C~37°C (default: 25°C)
Maximum temp (cooling)
[A.3.1.1.2.4] [9-02]
Eco (heating)
18°C~22°C (default: 22°C)
–10°C~+10°C (default: –2°C)
[7.4.2.7]
[A.3.1.1.2.1] [9-01]
Comfort (heating)
[A.3.1.1.2.3] [9-03]
Minimum temp (cooling)
Comfort (cooling)
–10°C~+10°C (default: 0°C)
Eco (cooling)
–10°C~+10°C (default: 2°C)
Temperature ranges (leaving water temperatures)
The purpose of this setting is to prevent selecting a wrong (i.e. too
hot or too cold) leaving water temperature. Therefore the available
desired heating temperature range and desired cooling temperature
range can be configured.
NOTICE
5°C~18°C (default: 5°C)
Leaving water temperature range for the additional leaving water
temperature zone (= the leaving water temperature zone with the
highest leaving water temperature in heating operation and the
lowest leaving water temperature in cooling operation)
[A.3.1.2.2.2] [9-06]
Maximum temp (heating)
37°C~depending on outdoor unit
(default: 55°C)
[A.3.1.2.2.1] [9-05]
Minimum temp (heating)
15°C~37°C (default: 25°C)
Maximum temp (cooling)
[A.3.1.2.2.4] [9-08]
In case of a floor heating application it is important to limit
the:
▪ maximum leaving water temperature at heating
operation according to the specifications of the floor
heating installation.
▪ the minimum leaving water temperature at cooling
operation to 18~20°C to prevent condensation on the
floor.
NOTICE
▪ When adjusting the leaving water temperature ranges,
all desired leaving water temperatures are also
adjusted to guarantee they are between the limits.
▪ Always balance between the desired leaving water
temperature with the desired room temperature and/or
the capacity (according to the design and selection of
the heat emitters). The desired leaving water
temperature is the result of several settings (preset
values, shift values, weather dependent curves,
modulation). As a result, too high or too low leaving
water temperatures could occur which lead to
overtemperatures or capacity shortage. By limiting the
leaving water temperature range to adequate values
(depending on the heat emitter), such situations can be
avoided.
18°C~22°C (default: 22°C)
[A.3.1.2.2.3] [9-07]
Minimum temp (cooling)
5°C~18°C (default: 5°C)
Leaving water temperature overshoot temperature
This function defines how much the water temperature may rise
above the desired leaving water temperature before the compressor
stops. The compressor will startup again when the leaving water
temperature drops below the desired leaving water temperature.
This function is ONLY applicable in heating mode.
#
Code
N/A
Description
[9-04]
1°C~4°C (default: 1°C)
Leaving water temperature compensation around 0°C
In heating operation, the desired leaving water temperature is locally
increased around an outdoor temperature of 0°C. This
compensation can be selected when using an absolute or a weather
dependent desired temperature (see illustration below). Use this
setting to compensate for possible heat losses of the building due to
the evaporation of melted ice or snow (e.g. in cold region countries).
Tt
Tt
L
L
R
R
Example: Set the minimum leaving water temperature to 28°C to
avoid NOT to be able to heat up the room: leaving water
temperatures MUST be sufficiently higher than the room
temperatures (in heating).
0°C
TA
0°C
a
a
b
#
N/A
TA
b
Absolute desired LWT
Weather dependent desired LWT
Code
[D-03]
Description
▪ 0 (disabled) (default)
▪ 1 (enabled) L=2°C,
R=4°C (−2°C<TA<2°C)
▪ 2 (enabled) L=4°C,
R=4°C (−2°C<TA<2°C)
#
Code
Description
Leaving water temperature range for the main leaving water
temperature zone (= the leaving water temperature zone with the
lowest leaving water temperature in heating operation and the
highest leaving water temperature in cooling operation)
Installer reference guide
60
▪ 3 (enabled) L=2°C,
R=8°C (−4°C<TA<4°C)
▪ 4 (enabled) L=4°C,
R=8°C (−4°C<TA<4°C)
ERHQ+ERLQ011~016 + EHBH/X11+16CB
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P384974-1B – 2017.04
8 Configuration
Leaving water temperature maximum modulation
ONLY applicable in room thermostat control and when modulation is
enabled. The maximum modulation (=variance) on the desired
leaving water temperature decided on the difference between the
actual and desired room temperature, e.g. 3°C modulation means
the desired leaving water temperature can be increased or lowered
by 3°C. Increasing the modulation results in better performance (less
On/OFF, faster heat up), but note that depending on the heat
emitter, there MUST ALWAYS be a balance (refer to the design and
selection of the heat emitters) between the desired leaving water
temperature and the desired room temperature.
#
Code
N/A
[8-06]
Description
0°C~10°C (default: 3°C)
Weather dependent cooling allowance
ONLY applicable for EHBX and EHVX. It is possible to disable
weather dependent cooling, meaning the desired leaving water
temperature in cooling operation does NOT depend on the outdoor
ambient temperature and this regardless whether weather
dependent is selected or NOT. Both for the main leaving water
temperature zone as for the additional leaving water temperature
zone, this can be set separately.
#
Code
[1-04]
N/A
N/A
[1-05]
#
Code
[A.3.2.4]
N/A
▪ 1°C (default). The desired room
temperature on the user interface is
settable per 1°C.
▪ 0.5°C. The desired room temperature
on the user interface is settable per
0.5°C. The actual room temperature is
displayed with an accuracy of 0.1°C.
Room temperature hysteresis
ONLY applicable in case of room thermostat control. The hysteresis
band around the desired room temperature is settable. It is
recommended NOT to change the room temperature hysteresis as it
is set for an optimal use of the system.
a
b
c
[9-0C]
d
a
b
c
d
Description
Weather dependent cooling of the main
leaving water temperature zone is…
#
Room temperature
Actual room temperature
Desired room temperature
Time
N/A
▪ 1 (enabled) (default)
Room temperature offset
▪ 0 (disabled)
▪ 1 (enabled) (default)
Temperature ranges (room temperature)
ONLY applicable in room thermostat control. In order to save energy
by preventing overheating or undercooling the room, you can limit
the range of the room temperature, both for heating and/or cooling.
Description
Code
▪ 0 (disabled)
Weather dependent cooling of the
additional leaving water temperature
zone is…
Description
Room temp. step
[9-0C]
1°C~6°C (default: 1°C)
ONLY applicable in case of room thermostat control. You can
calibrate the (external) room temperature sensor. It is possible to
give an offset to the room thermistor value measured by the user
interface or by the external room sensor. The settings can be used
to compensate for situations where the user interface or external
room sensor CANNOT be installed on the ideal installation location
(see installation manual and/or installer reference guide).
#
Code
Description
Room temp. offset: Offset on the actual room temperature
measured on the user interface sensor.
NOTICE
[A.3.2.2]
When adjusting the room temperature ranges, all desired
room temperatures are also adjusted to guarantee they are
between the limits.
Ext. room sensor offset: ONLY applicable if the external room
sensor option is installed and configured (see [C-08])
#
Code
Description
Room temp. range
[A.3.2.1.2]
[3-06]
Maximum temp (heating)
18°C~30°C (default: 30°C)
[A.3.2.1.1]
[3-07]
Minimum temp (heating)
12°C~18°C (default: 12°C)
[A.3.2.1.4]
[3-08]
[A.3.2.1.3]
[3-09]
Maximum temp (cooling)
[A.3.2.3]
[2-0A]
[2-09]
–5°C~5°C, step 0.5°C (default: 0°C)
–5°C~5°C, step 0.5°C (default: 0°C)
Room frost protection
Room frost protection prevents the room from getting too cold. This
setting behaves differently depending on the set unit control method
([C‑07]). Perform actions according to the table below:
Unit control method ([C‑07])
Room thermostat control
([C‑07]=2)
25°C~35°C (default: 35°C)
▪ Set [2‑06] to "1"
Minimum temp (cooling)
▪ Set
the
room
temperature ([2‑05]).
15°C~25°C (default: 15°C)
Room temperature step
ONLY applicable in room thermostat control and when the
temperature is displayed in °C.
Room frost protection
Allow for the room thermostat to
take care of room frost
protection:
antifrost
External room thermostat control Allow for the external room
([C‑07]=1)
thermostat to take care of room
frost protection:
▪ Turn ON the leaving water
temperature home page.
Leaving water temperature
control ([C‑07]=0)
ERHQ+ERLQ011~016 + EHBH/X11+16CB
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P384974-1B – 2017.04
Room frost protection is NOT
guaranteed.
Installer reference guide
61
8 Configuration
NOTICE
In case of…
If the system does NOT contain a backup heater, do NOT
change the default room antifrost temperature.
…then the following applies:
One leaving water temperature
zone
INFORMATION
If a U4 error occurs, room frost protection is NOT
guaranteed.
Refer to the sections below for detailed information on room frost
protection in relation to the applicable unit control method.
[C‑07]=2: room thermostat control
▪ When the leaving water
temperature home page is ON,
the external room thermostat
is "Thermo OFF" and the
outdoor ambient temperature
drops below 4°C, then the unit
will supply leaving water to the
heat emitters to heat up the
room again and the leaving
water temperature setpoint will
be lowered.
Under room thermostat control, room frost protection is guaranteed,
even if the room temperature home page is OFF on the user
interface. When room frost protection ([2‑06]) is enabled and the
room temperature drops below the room antifrost temperature
([2‑05]), the unit will supply leaving water to the heat emitters to heat
up the room again.
#
N/A
Code
[2-06]
Description
Room frost protection
▪ 0: disabled
▪ When the leaving water
temperature home page is ON
and
the
external
room
thermostat is "Thermo ON",
then room frost protection is
guaranteed by the normal
logic.
▪ 1: enabled (default)
N/A
[2-05]
Room antifrost temperature
4°C~16°C (default: 12°C)
INFORMATION
If a U5 error occurs:
▪ when 1 user interface is connected, room frost
protection is NOT guaranteed,
▪ when 2 user interfaces are connected and the second
user interface used for room temperature control is
disconnected (due to miswiring, damage of the cable),
then room frost protection is NOT guaranteed.
NOTICE
If Emergency is set to Manual ([A.6.C]=0), and the unit is
triggered to start emergency operation, the user interface
will ask confirmation before starting. Room frost protection
is active even if the user does NOT confirm emergency
operation.
[C‑07]=1: external room thermostat control
Under external room thermostat control, room frost protection is
guaranteed by the external room thermostat, provided that the
leaving water temperature home page is ON on the user interface,
and the auto emergency setting ([A.6.C]) is set to "1".
Additionally, limited frost protection by the unit is possible:
▪ When the leaving water
temperature home page is
OFF and the outdoor ambient
temperature drops below 4°C,
then the unit will supply
leaving water to the heat
emitters to heat up the room
again, and the leaving water
temperature setpoint will be
lowered.
Two leaving water temperature
zones
▪ When the leaving water
temperature home page is
OFF, and the outdoor ambient
temperature drops below 4°C,
then the unit will supply
leaving water to the heat
emitters to heat up the room
again, and the leaving water
temperature setpoint will be
lowered.
▪ When the leaving water
temperature home page is ON,
the
operation
mode
is
"heating", and the outdoor
ambient temperature drops
below 4°C, then the unit will
supply leaving water to the
heat emitters to heat up the
room again, and the leaving
water temperature setpoint will
be lowered.
▪ The selection of "cooling" or
"heating" is done via the user
interface. When the leaving
water temperature home page
is ON and the operation mode
is "cooling", then there is no
protection.
[C‑07]=0: leaving water temperature control
Under leaving water temperature control, room frost protection is
NOT guaranteed. However, if [2‑06] is set to "1", limited frost
protection by the unit is possible:
▪ When the leaving water temperature home page is OFF and the
outdoor ambient temperature drops below 4°C, then the unit will
supply leaving water to the heat emitters to heat up the room
again, and the leaving water temperature setpoint will be lowered.
Installer reference guide
62
ERHQ+ERLQ011~016 + EHBH/X11+16CB
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P384974-1B – 2017.04
8 Configuration
▪ When the leaving water temperature home page is ON and the
operation mode is "heating", then the unit will supply leaving water
to the heat emitters to heat up the room according to normal logic.
#
[A.3.3.2]
Code
[F-01]
Description
10°C~35°C (default: 20°C)
The same setting is also used in
automatic heating/cooling changeover.
▪ When the leaving water temperature home page is ON and the
operation mode is "cooling", then there is no protection.
Shut-off valve
Automatic heating/cooling changeover
The following is only applicable in case of 2 leaving water
temperature zones. In case of 1 leaving water temperature zone,
connect the shut-off valve to the heating/cooling output.
ONLY applicable for EHBX and EHVX. The end-user sets the
desired operation mode on the user interface: Heating, Cooling or
Automatic (see also operation manual/user reference guide). When
Automatic is selected, the changing of the operation mode is based
on:
The shut-off valve, which is in the main leaving water temperature
zone, output is configurable.
INFORMATION
During defrost operation, the shut-off valve is ALWAYS
opened.
Thermo On/OFF: the valve closes, depending on [F-0B] when there
is no heating demand from the main zone. Enable this setting to:
▪ avoid leaving water supply to the heat emitters in the main LWT
zone (through the mixing valve station) when there is request from
the additional LWT zone.
▪ activate the On/OFF pump of the mixing valve station ONLY when
there is demand. See "5 Application guidelines" on page 11.
#
Code
[A.3.1.1.6.1] [F-0B]
Description
The shut-off valve:
▪ 0 (No)(default): is NOT influenced by
heating or cooling demand.
▪ 1 (Yes): closes when there is NO
heating or cooling demand.
INFORMATION
The setting [F‑0B] is only valid when there is a thermostat
or external room thermostat request setting (NOT in case
of leaving water temperature setting).
Cooling: ONLY applicable for EHBX and EHVX. The shut-off valve
closes, depending on [F-0C] when the unit is running in cooling
operation mode. Enable this setting to avoid cold leaving water
through the heat emitter and the forming of condensation (e.g. under
floor heating loops or radiators).
#
Code
[A.3.1.1.6.2] [F-0C]
Description
The shut-off valve:
▪ 0 (No): is NOT influenced by changing
the space operation mode to cooling.
▪ Monthly allowance for heating and/or cooling: the end-user
indicates on a monthly base which operation is allowed ([7.5]: both
heating/cooling or heating ONLY or cooling ONLY). If the allowed
operation mode changes to cooling ONLY, the operation mode
changes to cooling. If the allowed operation mode changes to
heating ONLY, the operation mode changes to heating.
▪ Averaged outdoor temperature: the operation mode will be
changed in order to ALWAYS be within range determined by the
space heating OFF temperature for heating and the space cooling
On temperature for cooling. If the outdoor temperature drops, the
operation mode switches to heating and vice versa. Note that the
outdoor
temperature
will
be
time-averaged
(see
"8 Configuration" on page 49).
When the outdoor temperature is between the space cooling On and
the space heating OFF temperature, the operation mode remains
unchanged unless the system is configured in room thermostat
control with one leaving water temperature zone and quick heat
emitters. In that case, the operation mode will change based on:
▪ Measured indoor temperature: besides the heating and the
cooling desired room temperature, the installer sets a hysteresis
value (e.g. when in heating, this value is related to the desired
cooling temperature) and an offset value (e.g. when in heating,
this value is related to the desired heating temperature). Example:
the desired room temperature in heating is 22°C and in cooling
24°C, with a hysteresis value of 1°C and an offset of 4°C.
Changeover from heating to cooling will occur when the room
temperature rises above the maximum of the desired cooling
temperature added by the hysteresis value (thus 25°C) and the
desired heating temperature added by the offset value (thus
26°C). Oppositely, changeover from cooling to heating will occur
when the room temperature drops below the minimum of the
desired heating temperature subtracted by the hysteresis value
(thus 21°C) and the desired cooling temperature subtracted by the
offset value (thus 20°C).
▪ Guard timer to prevent too frequent changing from heating to
cooling and vice versa.
▪ 1 (Yes)(default): closes when the
space operation mode is cooling.
Changeover settings related to the outdoor temperature (ONLY
when automatic is selected):
Operation range
Depending on the average outdoor temperature, the operation of the
unit in space heating or space cooling is prohibited.
Space heating OFF temp: When the averaged outdoor temperature
raises above this value, space heating is turned OFF to avoid
overheating.
#
[A.3.3.1]
Code
[4-02]
Description
Space heating OFF temp. If the outdoor
temperature rises above this value, the
operation mode will change to cooling:
Description
▪ EHBH/X04+08 and EHVH/X04+08:
14°C~35°C (default: 25°C)
▪ EHBH/X04+08 and EHVH/X04+08:
14°C~35°C (default: 25°C)
▪ EHBH/X11+16 and EHVH/X11+16:
14°C~35°C (default: 35°C)
Code
[4-02]
#
[A.3.3.1]
▪ EHBH/X11+16 and EHVH/X11+16:
14°C~35°C (default: 35°C)
The same setting is also used in
automatic heating/cooling changeover.
[A.3.3.2]
[F-01]
Space cooling On temp. If the outdoor
temperature drops below this value, the
operation mode will change to heating:
Range: 10°C~35°C (default: 20°C)
Space cooling On temp: ONLY applicable for EHBX and EHVX.
When the averaged outdoor temperature drops below this value,
space cooling is turned OFF.
ERHQ+ERLQ011~016 + EHBH/X11+16CB
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P384974-1B – 2017.04
Installer reference guide
63
8 Configuration
#
Code
N/A
[4-0B]
Hysteresis: Ensures that changeover is
ONLY done when necessary. Example:
The space operation mode ONLY
changes from cooling to heating when
the room temperature drops below the
desired heating temperature subtracted
by the hysteresis.
Range: 1°C~10°C, step 0.5°C (default:
1°C)
N/A
[4-0D]
Offset: Ensures that the active desired
room temperature can be reached.
Example: if heating to cooling
changeover would occur below the
desired room temperature in heating, this
desired room temperature could never
be reached.
Range: 1°C~10°C, step 0.5°C (default:
3°C)
8.3.2
Domestic hot water control: advanced
Only applicable when domestic hot water preparation is scheduled
or scheduled + reheat.
You can define preset tank temperatures:
▪ storage economic
▪ storage comfort
▪ reheat
▪ reheat hysteresis
Preset values make it easy to use the same value in the schedule. If
you later want to change the value, you only have to do it in 1 place
(see also operation manual and/or user reference guide).
Storage comfort
When programming the schedule, you can make use of the tank
temperatures set as preset values. The tank will then heat up until
these setpoint temperatures have been reached. Additionally, a
storage stop can be programmed. This feature puts a stop to tank
heating even if the setpoint has NOT been reached. Only program a
storage stop when tank heating is absolutely undesirable.
#
Code
[6-0A]
[7.4.3.3]
Code
[6-0C]
Description
30°C~min(50, [6‑0E])°C (default: 45°C)
Reheat hysteresis
Only applicable when domestic hot water preparation is scheduled +
reheat.
#
N/A
Code
[6-08]
Description
2°C~20°C (default: 10°C)
Weather dependent
The weather dependent installer settings define the parameters for
the weather dependent operation of the unit. When weather
dependent operation is active the desired tank temperature is
determined automatically depending on the averaged outdoor
temperature: low outdoor temperatures will result in higher desired
tank temperatures as the cold water tap is colder and vice versa. In
case of scheduled or scheduled+reheat domestic hot water
preparation, the storage comfort temperature is weather dependent
(according to the weather dependent curve), the storage economic
and reheat temperature are NOT weather dependent. In case of
reheat only domestic hot water preparation, the desired tank
temperature is weather dependent (according to the weather
dependent curve). During weather dependent operation, the enduser cannot adjust the desired tank temperature on the user
interface.
#
Preset tank temperatures
[7.4.3.1]
#
Description
Changeover settings related to the indoor temperature. ONLY
applicable when Automatic is selected and the system is configured
in room thermostat control with 1 leaving water temperature zone
and quick heat emitters.
[A.4.6]
Code
N/A
Description
Weather dependent desired tank
temperature is:
▪ Fixed (default): disabled. All desired
tank temperature are NOT weather
dependent.
▪ Weather dep.: enabled. In scheduled
or scheduled+reheat mode, the
storage comfort temperature is
weather dependent. Storage economic
and reheat temperatures are NOT
weather dependent. In reheat mode,
the desired tank temperature is
weather dependent.
Note: When the displayed tank
temperature is weather dependent, it
cannot be adjusted on the user
interface.
Description
30°C~[6‑0E]°C (default: 60°C)
Storage eco
The storage economic temperature denotes the lower desired tank
temperature. It is the desired temperature when a storage economic
action is scheduled (preferably during day).
#
[7.4.3.2]
Code
[6-0B]
Description
30°C~min(50, [6‑0E])°C (default: 45°C)
Reheat
The desired reheat tank temperature is used:
▪ in reheat mode of scheduled + reheat mode: The guaranteed
minimum tank temperature is set by THP OFF–[6‑08], which is either
[6‑0C] or the weather dependent setpoint, minus the reheat
hysteresis. If the tank temperature drops below this value, the tank
is heated up.
Installer reference guide
64
ERHQ+ERLQ011~016 + EHBH/X11+16CB
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P384974-1B – 2017.04
8 Configuration
#
[A.4.7]
Code
[0-0E]
[0-0D]
[0-0C]
Booster heater and heat pump operation
Description
Weather-dependent curve
#
TDHW
N/A
[0-0C]
[0-0B]
[0-0B]
[0-0E]
[0-0D]
Ta
▪ TDHW: The desired tank temperature.
▪ Ta: The (averaged) outdoor ambient
temperature
▪ [0-0E]:
low
outdoor
temperature: −40°C~5°C
−10°C)
ambient
(default:
▪ [0-0D]:
high
outdoor
temperature: 10°C~25°C
15°C)
ambient
(default:
▪ [0-0C]: desired tank temperature when
the outdoor temperature equals or
drops below the low ambient
temperature: 45°C~[6‑0E]°C (default:
60°C)
▪ [0-0B]: desired tank temperature when
the outdoor temperature equals or
rises above the high ambient
temperature: 35°C~[6‑0E]°C (default:
55°C)
Code
[4-03]
Description
Defines the operation permission of the
booster heater depending on ambient,
domestic hot water temperature or
operation mode of heat pump. This
setting is only applicable in reheat mode
for applications with separate domestic
hot water tank.
▪ 0: Booster heater operation is NOT
allowed except for "Disinfection
function" and "Powerful domestic
water heating".
Only use this in case the capacity of
the heat pump can cover the heating
requirements of the house and
domestic hot water over the complete
heating season.
If the outdoor temperature is below
setting [5-03] and [5-02]=1, the
domestic hot water will not be heated.
The domestic hot water temperature
can be maximum the heat pump OFF
temperature.
▪ 1: Booster heater operation is allowed
when required.
▪ 2: The booster heater is allowed
outside the operation range of the heat
pump for domestic hot water
operation.
Booster heater operation is only
allowed if:
▪ Ambient temperature is out of the
operating range: Ta<[5-03] or
Ta>35°C
▪ Domestic hot water temperature is
2°C lower than the heat pump OFF
temperature.
continued >>
ERHQ+ERLQ011~016 + EHBH/X11+16CB
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P384974-1B – 2017.04
Installer reference guide
65
8 Configuration
#
N/A
Code
[4-03]
TDHW
Description
<< continuation
The booster heater will be allowed to
operate when Ta<[5-03] depends of the
status of [5-02].
If bivalent operation is enabled and
permission signal for auxiliary boiler is
ON, the booster heater will be restricted
even when Ta<[5-03]. See [C-02].
60
THP MAX 50
THP OFF 48
When setting [4-03]=1/2/3/4, the booster
heater operation can still be restricted by
the booster heater allowance schedule.
N/A
[7-00]
[7-01]
[6-00]
30
20
HP
10
TBH OFF
TBH ON
THP MAX
THP OFF
THP ON
TDHW
TU
t
HP
Booster heater
Heat pump. If heating up time by the heat pump takes too
long, auxiliary heating by the booster heater can take place
Booster heater OFF temperature (TU+[7-00])
Booster heater ON temperature (TBH OFF−[7-01])
Maximum heat pump temperature at sensor in domestic
hot water tank
Heat pump OFF temperature (THP MAX−[6-01])
Heat pump ON temperature (THP OFF−[6-00])
Domestic hot water temperature
User set point temperature (as set on the user interface)
Time
TDHW
THP MAX 50
TU=THP OFF 45
THP ON 43
[6-00]
40
30
20
HP
10
5
Hysteresis. Temperature difference
between booster heater ON and booster
heater OFF temperature. The minimum
hysteresis temperature is 2°C.
t
HP
THP MAX
Heat pump. If heating up time by the heat pump takes too
long, auxiliary heating by the booster heater can take place
Maximum heat pump temperature at sensor in domestic
hot water tank
Heat pump OFF temperature (THP MAX−[6-01])
Heat pump ON temperature (THP OFF−[6-00])
Domestic hot water temperature
User set point temperature (as set on the user interface)
Time
N/A
[6-00]
The temperature difference determining
the heat pump ON temperature.
THP OFF
THP ON
TDHW
TU
t
Range: 2°C~20°C (default: 2°C)
INFORMATION
N/A
[6-01]
The temperature difference determining
the heat pump OFF temperature.
The maximum heat pump temperature depends on the
ambient temperature. For more information, see the
operation range.
Range: 0°C~10°C (default: 2°C)
Timers for simultaneous request space and domestic hot water
operation
#
N/A
66
= 70°C
= 3°C
= 2°C
= 7°C
Example: setpoint (TU)≤maximum heat pump temperature–[6‑01]
(THP MAX–[6‑01])
Range: 2°C~40°C (default: 2°C)
Installer reference guide
TU
[7-00]
[6-01]
[6-00]
t
BH
HP
Overshoot temperature. Temperature
difference above the domestic hot water
set point temperature before the booster
heater is turned OFF. The domestic hot
water tank temperature will increase with
[7-00] above selected temperature
set point.
Example: setpoint (TU)>maximum heat pump temperature–[6‑01]
(THP MAX–[6‑01])
BH
5
Range: 0°C~4°C (default: 0°C)
N/A
[6-01]
THP ON 41
40
▪ 3 (default): The booster heater is
allowed when the heat pump is NOT
active in domestic hot water operation.
Same as setting 1, but simultaneous
heat pump domestic hot water
operation
and
booster
heater
operation is not allowed.
▪ 4: Booster heater operation is NOT
allowed except for "Disinfection
function".
Only use this in case the capacity of
the heat pump can cover the heating
requirements of the house and
domestic hot water over the complete
heating season.
If the outdoor temperature is below
setting [5-03] and [5-02]=1, the
domestic hot water will not be heated.
The domestic hot water temperature
can be maximum the heat pump OFF
temperature.
[7-01]
[7-00]
TBH OFF 73
TBH ON 71
TU 70
Code
[8-00]
Description
Do not change. (default: 1)
ERHQ+ERLQ011~016 + EHBH/X11+16CB
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P384974-1B – 2017.04
8 Configuration
#
N/A
Code
[8-01]
Description
1
Maximum running time for domestic hot
water operation. Domestic hot water
heating stops even when the target
domestic hot water temperature is NOT
reached. The actual maximum running
time also depends on setting [8-04].
0
1
0
▪ When system layout = Room
thermostat control: This preset value is
only taken into account if there is a
request for space heating or cooling. If
there is NO request for space heating/
cooling, the tank is heated until the
setpoint has been reached.
▪ When system layout ≠ Room
thermostat control: This preset value is
always taken into account.
Range: 5~95 minutes (default: 30)
N/A
[8-02]
[8-03]
[8-01]
1
2
t
1
0
1
3
0
1
0
Range: 0~10 hours (default: 0.5) (step:
0.5 hour) (only for EHVH/X).
1
Remark: The minimum time is 1/2 hour
even when the selected value is 0.
0
Booster heater delay timer.
1
2
Start-up delay time for the booster heater
when domestic hot water mode is active.
3
▪ When domestic hot water mode is
NOT active, the delay time is
20 minutes.
▪ By adapting the booster heater delay
time versus the maximum running
time, you can find an optimal balance
between the energy efficiency and the
heat up time.
▪ If the booster heater delay time is set
too high, it might take a long time
before the domestic hot water reaches
its set temperature.
▪ The setting [8-03] is only meaningful if
setting [4-03]=1. Setting [4-03]=0/2/3/4
limits the booster heater automatically
in relation to heat pump operation time
in domestic water heating mode.
▪ Make sure that [8-03] is always in
relation with the maximum running
time [8-01].
Range: 20~95 minutes (default: 50).
[8-04]
Additional running time for the maximum
running time depending on the outdoor
temperature [4-02] or [F-01].
t
[8-03]
Only for EKHW
N/A
Heat pump domestic water heating mode (1=active, 0=not
active)
Hot water request for heat pump (1=request, 0=no request)
Time
4
Range: 0~10 hours (default: 3) (step: 0.5
hour) (only for EHBH/X).
▪ The delay time starts from booster
heater ON temperature.
t
[8-02]
[8-03]: Booster heater delay timer
Anti-recycling time.
Minimum time between two cycles for
domestic hot water. The actual antirecycling time also depends on setting
[8-04].
N/A
[8-00]
4
t
Booster heater operation (1=active, 0=not active)
Heat pump domestic water heating mode (1=active, 0=not
active)
Hot water request for booster heater (1=request, 0=no
request)
Hot water request for heat pump (1=request, 0=no request)
Time
[8-04]: Additional running time at [4-02]/[F-01]
t
t
[8-01]+
[8-04]
[8-01]+
[8-04]
[8-02]
[8-02]
[8-01]
[8-01]
0
[5-03]
TA
t
[4-02]
TA
0
[F-01]
35°C
TA
Ambient (outdoor) temperature
Time
Anti-recycle time
Maximum running time domestic hot water
Disinfection
Applies only to installations with a domestic hot water tank.
The disinfection function disinfects the domestic hot water tank by
periodically heating the domestic hot water to a specific temperature.
CAUTION
The disinfection function settings MUST be configured by
the installer according to the applicable legislation.
Range: 0~95 minutes (default: 95).
[8-02]: Anti-recycling time
ERHQ+ERLQ011~016 + EHBH/X11+16CB
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P384974-1B – 2017.04
Installer reference guide
67
8 Configuration
#
Code
[A.4.4.2]
[2‑00]
CAUTION
Description
Operation day:
The booster heater permission schedule is used to restrict
or allow booster heater operation based on a weekly
program. Advice: In order to avoid unsuccessful
disinfection function, at least allow the booster heater (by
the weekly program) for minimum 4 hours starting from the
scheduled start-up of disinfection. If the booster heater is
restricted during disinfection, this function will NOT be
successful and the applicable warning AH will be
generated.
▪ 0: Each day
▪ 1: Monday
▪ 2: Tuesday
▪ 3: Wednesday
▪ 4: Thursday
▪ 5: Friday
[2‑01]
[A.4.4.1]
▪ 6: Saturday
INFORMATION
▪ 7: Sunday
In case of error code AH and no interruption of the
disinfection function occurred due to domestic hot water
tapping, following actions are recommended:
Disinfection
▪ 0: No
▪ When the Domestic hot water > Type > Reheat or
Reheat + sched. is selected, it is recommended to
program the start-up of the disinfection function at least
4 hours later than the last expected large hot water
tapping. This start-up can be set by installer settings
(disinfection function).
▪ 1: Yes
[A.4.4.3]
[2‑02]
Start time: 00~23:00, step: 1:00.
[A.4.4.4]
[2‑03]
Temperature target:
▪ With booster
default: 70°C.
heater:
55°C~80°C,
▪ When the Domestic hot water > Type > Scheduled only
is selected, it is recommended to program a Storage
eco 3 hours before the scheduled start-up of the
disinfection function to preheat the tank.
▪ Without booster heater: 60°C (fixed).
[A.4.4.5]
[2‑04]
Duration:
▪ With booster heater: 5~60 minutes,
default: 10 minutes.
▪ Without
booster
heater:
minutes, default: 40 minutes.
INFORMATION
40~60
Disinfection function is restarted in case the domestic hot
water temperature drops 5°C below the disinfection target
temperature within the duration time.
TDHW
[2-03]
[2-04]
INFORMATION
An AH error occurs if you do the following during
disinfection:
TH
▪ Set the user permission level to Installer.
TU
▪ Go to the DHW tank temperature home page (Tank).
▪ Press
00.00
01.00
22.00
23.00
24.00
t
[2-02]
TDHW
TU
TH
t
Domestic hot water temperature
User set point temperature
High set point temperature [2-03]
Time
WARNING
Be aware that the domestic hot water temperature at the
hot water tap will be equal to the value selected in field
setting [2-03] after a disinfection operation.
8.3.3
Heat source settings
Backup heater
For systems without domestic hot water tank or with separate
domestic hot water tank (only for EHBH/X)
Backup heater operation mode: defines when backup heater
operation is enabled or disabled. This setting is only overruled when
backup heating is required during defrost operation or malfunctioning
of the outdoor unit (when [A.6.C] is enabled).
When the high domestic hot water temperature can be a
potential risk for human injuries, a mixing valve (field
supply) shall be installed at the hot water outlet connection
of the domestic hot water tank. This mixing valve shall
secure that the hot water temperature at the hot water tap
never rise above a set maximum value. This maximum
allowable hot water temperature shall be selected
according to the applicable legislation.
For systems with an integrated domestic hot water tank (only
for EHVH/X)
CAUTION
[A.5.1.1]
Backup heater operation mode: defines when backup heater
operation is disabled or only allowed during domestic hot water
operation. This setting is only overruled when backup heating is
required during defrost operation or malfunctioning of the outdoor
unit (when [A.6.C] is enabled).
#
Be sure that the disinfection function start time [A.4.4.3]
with defined duration [A.4.4.5] is NOT interrupted by
possible domestic hot water demand.
Installer reference guide
68
to interrupt the disinfection.
Code
[4‑00]
Description
Backup heater operation:
▪ 0: Disabled
▪ 1 (default): Enabled
ERHQ+ERLQ011~016 + EHBH/X11+16CB
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P384974-1B – 2017.04
8 Configuration
#
Code
[A.5.1.3]
[4‑07]
INFORMATION
Description
Defines whether backup heater second
step is:
If a heat pump failure occurs and [A.6.C] is set to Manual,
the room frost protection function, the underfloor heating
screed dryout function, and the water pipe antifreeze
function will remain active even if the user does NOT
confirm emergency operation.
▪ 1: Allowed
▪ 0: NOT allowed
In this way it is possible to limit the
backup heater capacity.
[5-00]
N/A
Is backup heater operation allowed
above equilibrium temperature during
space heating operation?
▪ 1: NOT allowed
▪ 0: Allowed
[A.5.1.4]
[5‑01]
Equilibrium temperature.
Outdoor temperature below which
operation of the backup heater is
allowed.
Range: –15°C~35°C (default: 0°C) (step:
1°C)
Bivalent
Applies only to installations with an auxiliary boiler (alternating
operation, parallel connected). The purpose of this function is to
determine — based on the outdoor temperature (possibility 1) or on
energy prices (possibility 2) — which heating source can/will provide
the space heating, either the indoor unit or an auxiliary boiler.
The field setting "bivalent operation" applies only the indoor unit
space heating operation and the permission signal for the auxiliary
boiler.
Possibility 1
The installer can set a temperature below which the boiler will
always operate when electric prices (High, Medium, Low) are "0" in
the menu structure.
INFORMATION
NOTICE
Only for systems with integrated domestic hot water tank: If
backup heater operation during space heating needs to be
limited but can be allowed for domestic hot water
operation, then set [4‑00] to 2.
Do NOT use overview settings!
INFORMATION
Only for systems with integrated domestic hot water tank: If
the storage temperature set point is higher than 50°C,
Daikin recommends NOT to disable the backup heater
second step because it will have a big impact on the
required time for the unit to heat up the domestic hot water
tank.
Auto emergency
When the heat pump fails to operate, the backup heater and booster
heater can serve as an emergency heater and either automatically
or non-automatically take over the heat load.
▪ When auto emergency is set to Automatic and a heat pump failure
occurs:
When the "bivalent operation" function is enabled, the indoor unit will
stop automatically in space heating operation when the outdoor
temperature drops below "bivalent ON temperature" and the
permission signal for the auxiliary boiler becomes active.
When the bivalent operation function is disabled, the space heating
by indoor unit is possible at all outdoor temperatures (see operation
ranges) and permission signal for auxiliary boiler is ALWAYS
deactivated.
▪ [C‑03] Bivalent ON temperature: defines the outdoor temperature
below which the permission signal for the auxiliary boiler will be
active (closed, KCR on EKRP1HB) and space heating by indoor
unit will be stopped.
▪ [C‑04] Bivalent hysteresis: defines the temperature difference
between bivalent ON temperature and bivalent OFF temperature.
Permission signal X1–X2 (EKRP1HB)
a
[C-04]
▪ The backup heater will automatically take over the heat load.
▪ The booster heater will automatically take over the domestic hot
water production.
▪ When auto emergency is set to Manual and a heat pump failure
occurs, the domestic hot water and space heating operations will
stop and need to be recovered manually. The user interface will
then ask you to confirm whether the backup heater or booster
heater can take over the heat load or not.
When the heat pump fails, will appear on the user interface. If the
house is unattended for longer periods, we recommend to set
[A.6.C] Emergency to Automatic.
#
[A.6.C]
Code
N/A
Description
b
TA
[C-03]
TA
a
b
#
Outdoor temperature
Closed
Open
Code
Description
N/A
[C-03]
Range: –25°C~25°C (default: 0°C) (step:
1°C)
N/A
[C-04]
Range: 2°C~10°C (default: 3°C) (step:
1°C)
Possibility 2
Emergency:
▪ 0: Manual (default)
▪ 1: Automatic
INFORMATION
If [4‑03]=1 or 3, then Emergency=Manual is not applicable
for the booster heater.
The installer can set a temperature range ([C‑04]). Depending on the
energy prices, a calculated point Tcalc changes between this range.
#
Code
[7.4.5.1]
N/A
[7.4.5.2]
N/A
[7.4.5.3]
N/A
ERHQ+ERLQ011~016 + EHBH/X11+16CB
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P384974-1B – 2017.04
What is the high electricity
price?
INFORMATION
The auto emergency setting can be set in the menu
structure of the user interface only.
Description
What is the medium electricity
price?
What is the low electricity
price?
Installer reference guide
69
8 Configuration
#
Code
[7.4.6]
N/A
INFORMATION
Description
What is the fuel price?
▪ The combination of setting [4‑03]=0/2 with bivalent
operation at low outdoor temperature can result in
domestic hot water shortage.
NOTICE
▪ The bivalent operation function has no impact on the
domestic water heating mode. The domestic hot water
is still and only heated by the indoor unit.
Do NOT use overview settings!
When TA reaches the Tcalc point, then the bivalent heat source
permission will be active. To prevent too much switching, there is a
hysteresis of 3°C.
▪ The permission signal for the auxiliary boiler is located
on the EKRP1HB (digital I/O PCB). When it is
activated, the contact X1, X2 is closed and open when
it is deactivated. See illustration below for the
schematic location of this contact.
▪ [C‑03] ON temperature. Below this temperature, bivalent will
always be ON. Tcalc is ignored.
▪ [C‑04] Operation range between which Tcalc is calculated.
b
[C-03]
Tcalc
TA
Tcalc
a
b
#
[C-03]+[C-04]
TA
Code
SS1
X1M
Description
[C-03]
Range: –25°C~25°C (default: 0°C) (step:
1°C)
N/A
[C-04]
Range: 2°C~10°C (default: 3°C) (step:
1°C)
It is recommended to choose [C‑04] bigger than the default value to
have an optimal operation when choosing possibility 2. Depending
on the used boiler, the boiler efficiency should be chosen as follows:
#
OFF ON
Outdoor temperature
Calculated temperature
Closed
Open
N/A
[A.6.A]
X2M
X1 X2 X3 X4
3°C
a
Code
[7‑05]
Description
▪ 0: Very high
▪ 1: High
YC Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4
Bottom plate heater
Applies only to installation with an outdoor unit ERHQ and the option
bottom plate heater kit is installed.
▪ [F-02] Bottom plate heater ON temperature: defines the outdoor
temperature below which the bottom plate heater will be activated
by indoor unit in order to prevent ice build-up in the bottom plate of
the outdoor unit at lower outdoor temperatures.
▪ 3: Low
▪ [F-03] Bottom plate heater hysteresis: defines the temperature
difference between bottom plate heater ON temperature and the
bottom plate heater OFF temperature.
Bottom plate heater
▪ 4: Very low
a
▪ 2: Medium
[F-03]
INFORMATION
Electricity price can only be set when bivalent is ON
([A.2.2.6.1] or [C-02]). These values can only be set in
menu structure [7.4.5.1], [7.4.5.2] and [7.4.5.3]. Do NOT
use overview settings.
b
TA
[F-02]
TA
a
b
Outdoor temperature
On
OFF
INFORMATION
CAUTION
Boiler efficiency [A.6.A] or [7‑05] becomes visible when
bivalent is ON ([A.2.2.6.1] or [C‑02]).
The bottom plate heater is controlled via EKRP1HB.
CAUTION
Make sure to observe all rules mentioned in application
guideline 5 when bivalent operation function is enabled.
Daikin shall NOT be held liable for any damage resulting
from failure to observe this rule.
#
Code
Description
N/A
[F-02]
Bottom plate heater ON temperature:
3°C~10°C (default: 3°C)
N/A
[F-03]
Hysteresis: 2°C~5°C (default: 5°C)
INFORMATION
Depending on setting [F-04], contact Y2, located on digital
I/O PCB EKRP1HB, controls the optional bottom plate
heater. See the illustration below for the schematic location
of this contact. For the complete wiring, see the wiring
diagram.
Installer reference guide
70
ERHQ+ERLQ011~016 + EHBH/X11+16CB
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P384974-1B – 2017.04
8 Configuration
X1 X2 X3 X4
X2M
#
N/A
Code
[5‑02]
Defines whether backup heater will
assist the heat pump during domestic
hot water operation.
OFF ON
SS1
Consequence: Shorter tank heating
operation time and shorter interruption
of the space heating cycle.
X1M
This setting MUST always be 1.
[5‑01] Equilibrium temperature and
[5‑03] Space heating priority
temperature are related to backup
heater. So, you must set [5‑03] equal or
a few degrees higher than [5‑01].
YC Y1 Y2 Y3 Y4
System settings
8.3.4
If the backup heater operation is limited
([4‑00]=0) and the outdoor temperature
is lower than setting [5‑03], the
domestic hot water will not be heated
with the backup heater.
Priorities
For systems with separate domestic hot water tank (only for
EHBH/X)
#
N/A
Code
[5-02]
Description
▪ 0: disabled
▪ 1: enabled
[5‑01] Equilibrium temperature and
[5‑03] Space heating priority
temperature are related to backup
heater. So, you must set [5‑03] equal or
a few degrees higher than [5‑01].
[5-03]
N/A
[5‑03]
Space heating priority.
Defines whether domestic hot water is
made by booster heater only when
outdoor temperature is below space
heating priority temperature. It is
recommended to enable this function to
shorten tank heating operation time
and guaranteed domestic hot water
comfort.
N/A
Space heating priority temperature.
Defines the outdoor temperature which
below the domestic hot water will be
heated by booster heater only.
[5-04]
Set point correction for domestic hot
water temperature: set point correction
for the desired domestic hot water
temperature, to be applied at low
outdoor temperature when space
heating priority is enabled. The
corrected (higher) set point will make
sure that the total heat capacity of the
water in the tank remains
approximately unchanged, by
compensating for the colder bottom
water layer of the tank (because the
heat exchanger coil is not operational)
with a warmer top layer.
Space heating priority temperature.
Defines the outdoor temperature which
below the backup heater will assist
during domestic hot water heating.
N/A
[C‑00]
If a solar kit is installed, what has
priority to heat up the tank?
▪ 0: Solar kit
▪ 1: Heat pump
Auto-restart
When power returns after a power supply failure, the auto restart
function reapplies the remote controller settings at the time of the
power failure. Therefore, it is recommended to always enable the
function.
If the preferential kWh rate power supply is of the type that power
supply is interrupted, always enable the auto restart function.
Continuous indoor unit control can be guaranteed independent of the
preferential kWh rate power supply status, by connecting the indoor
unit to a normal kWh rate power supply.
#
[A.6.1]
Code
[3‑00]
Range: –15°C~35°C (default: 0°C).
N/A
Description
Space heating priority.
Description
Is the auto restart function of the unit
allowed?
▪ 0: No
▪ 1 (default): Yes
Preferential kWh rate power supply
INFORMATION
The preferential kWh rate power supply contact is
connected to the same terminals (X5M/3+4) as the safety
thermostat. It is only possible for the system to have
EITHER preferential kWh rate power supply OR a safety
thermostat.
Range: 0°C~20°C (default: 10°C).
N/A
[C-00]
If a solar kit is installed, what has
priority to heat up the tank?
▪ 0: Solar kit
▪ 1: Heat pump
For systems with an integrated domestic hot water tank (only
for EHVH/X)
ERHQ+ERLQ011~016 + EHBH/X11+16CB
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P384974-1B – 2017.04
Installer reference guide
71
8 Configuration
#
[A.2.1.6]
Code
Description
[D‑01]
Safety thermostat
Connection to a preferential kWh rate
power supply:
INFORMATION
The preferential kWh rate power supply contact is
connected to the same terminals (X5M/3+4) as the safety
thermostat. It is only possible for the system to have
EITHER preferential kWh rate power supply OR a safety
thermostat.
▪ 0 (default): The outdoor unit is
connected to a normal power supply.
▪ 1: The outdoor unit is connected to a
preferential kWh rate power supply.
When the preferential kWh rate signal
is sent by the electricity company, the
contact will open and the unit will go in
forced off mode. When the signal is
released again, the voltage-free
contact will close and the unit will
restart operation. Therefore, always
enable the auto restart function.
▪ 2: The outdoor unit is connected to a
preferential kWh rate power supply.
When the preferential kWh rate signal
is sent by the electricity company, the
contact will close and the unit will go in
forced off mode. When the signal is
released again, the voltage-free
contact will open and the unit will
restart operation. Therefore, always
enable the auto restart function.
Remark: 3 is related to safety
thermostat.
[A.6.2.1]
Which heaters are allowed to operate
during preferential kWh rate power
supply?
[D‑00]
▪ 0 (default): None
Description
Code
#
[A.2.1.6]
[D‑01]
Connection to a safety thermostat
voltage free contact:
▪ 0 (default): No safety thermostat.
▪ 3: Safety thermostat normal closed
contact.
Remark: 1+2 are related to preferential
kWh rate power supply.
Power saving function
INFORMATION
Only applicable for ERLQ004~008CAV3.
Defines whether the outdoor unit power supply can be interrupted
(internally by indoor unit control) during stand-still conditions (no
space heating/cooling nor domestic hot water demand). The final
decision to allow power interruption of the outdoor unit during
standstill depends on the ambient temperature, compressor
conditions and minimum internal timers.
To enable the power saving function setting, [E‑08] needs to be
enabled on the user interface in combination with the removal of the
power saving connector at the outdoor unit.
▪ 1: N/A
NOTICE
▪ 2: Backup heater only
The power saving connector at the outdoor unit shall only
be removed when the main power supply to the application
is switched OFF.
▪ 3: N/A
In case of ERLQ004~008CAV3
See table below.
Setting 2 is only meaningful if the
preferential kWh rate power supply is of
type 1 or indoor unit is connected to a
normal kWh rate power supply (via
X2M/30-31) and the backup heater is
NOT connected to the preferential kWh
rate power supply.
Only for EHBH/X + EKHW:
[D‑00]
Booster heater
0 (default)
Forced OFF
1
Permitted
2
Forced OFF
3
Permitted
Backup heater
Forced OFF
Compressor
Forced OFF
Permitted
Only for EHVH/X: Do NOT use 1 or 3.
[D‑00]
Backup heater
0 (default)
Forced OFF
2
Allowed
3×
Compressor
Forced OFF
123
#
N/A
Code
[E‑08]
Description
Power saving function for outdoor unit:
▪ 0: Disabled
▪ 1 (default): Enabled
Installer reference guide
72
ERHQ+ERLQ011~016 + EHBH/X11+16CB
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P384974-1B – 2017.04
8 Configuration
In
case
of
ERHQ011~016BAV3,
ERHQ011~016BAW1,
ERLQ011~016CAV3, and ERLQ011~016CAW1
#
Code
[A.6.3.6.3]
[5-0B]
Do NOT change the default setting.
#
N/A
Code
[E-08]
0 kW~20 kW, step: 0.5 kW (default:
20 kW)
Description
Power saving function for outdoor unit:
[A.6.3.6.4]
[5-0C]
Priority: Only applicable in case of an optional EKHW.
Power consumption control
[A.6.3.7]
[4-01]
Only applicable for EHBH/X04+08 + EHVH/X04+08. See
"5 Application guidelines" on page 11 for detailed information about
this functionality.
[A.6.3.1]
Code
[4-08]
▪ 1 (BSH): The booster heater is
prioritized.
Description
Mode:
▪ 2 (BUH): The backup heater is
prioritized.
▪ 0 (No limitation)(default): Disabled.
▪ 1 (Continuous): Enabled: You can
set one power limitation value (in A
or kW) to which the system power
consumption will be limited for all the
time.
Power consumption control
ENABLED [4‑08]=1 or 2
▪ 0 (None)(default): Depending on the
power limitation level, the booster
heater will be limited first, before the
backup heater is limited.
▪ 2 (Digital inputs): Enabled: You can
set up to four different power
limitation values (in A or kW) to
which
the
system
power
consumption will be limited when the
corresponding digital input asks.
[A.6.3.2]
[4-09]
▪ 1 (BSH): Depending on the power
limitation level, the backup heater will
be limited first, before the booster
heater is limited.
▪ 2 (BUH): Depending on the power
limitation level, the booster heater
will be limited first, before the backup
heater is limited.
Type:
▪ 0 (Current): The limitation values are
set in A.
▪ 1 (Power)(default): The limitation
values are set in kW.
[A.6.3.3]
[5-05]
[A.6.3.4]
[5-09]
Value: Only applicable in case of full
time power limitation mode.
0 A~50 A, step: 1 A (default: 50 A)
Value: Only applicable in case of full
time power limitation mode.
0 kW~20 kW, step: 0.5 kW (default:
20 kW)
Power consumption control
DISABLED [4‑08]=0
▪ 0 (None)(default): Backup heater and
booster
heater
can
operate
simultaneously.
Pwr consumpt. control
#
Limit DI4
0 kW~20 kW, step: 0.5 kW (default:
20 kW)
▪ 0 (default): Disabled
▪ 1: Enabled
Description
Limit DI3
Note: In case of power consumption control is DISABLED (for all
models) the setting [4‑01] defines whether backup heater and
booster heater can operate simultaneously, or if the booster heater/
backup heater has priority over the backup heater/booster heater.
In case of power consumption control is ENABLED (only for EHBH/
X04+08 and EHVH/X04+08), the setting [4‑01] defines the priority of
the electrical heaters depending on applicable limitation.
Average timer
Amp. limits for DI: Only applicable in case of power limitation mode
based on digital inputs and based on current values.
The average timer corrects the influence of ambient temperature
variations. The weather-dependent set point calculation is done on
the average outdoor temperature.
[A.6.3.5.1]
The outdoor temperature is averaged over the selected time period.
[5-05]
Limit DI1
0 A~50 A, step: 1 A (default: 50 A)
[A.6.3.5.2]
[5-06]
[A.6.3.5.3]
[5-07]
Limit DI2
#
[A.6.4]
Code
[1-0A]
0 A~50 A, step: 1 A (default: 50 A)
▪ 0: No averaging (default)
Limit DI3
▪ 1: 12 hours
0 A~50 A, step: 1 A (default: 50 A)
[A.6.3.5.4]
[5-08]
▪ 2: 24 hours
Limit DI4
▪ 3: 48 hours
0 A~50 A, step: 1 A (default: 50 A)
kW limits for DI: Only applicable in case of power limitation mode
based on digital inputs and based on power values.
[A.6.3.6.1]
[5-09]
Limit DI1
0 kW~20 kW, step: 0.5 kW (default:
20 kW)
[A.6.3.6.2]
[5-0A]
Limit DI2
0 kW~20 kW, step: 0.5 kW (default:
20 kW)
Description
Outdoor average timer:
▪ 4: 72 hours
INFORMATION
If the power saving function is activated (see [E‑08]), the
average outdoor temperature calculation is only possible in
case the external outdoor temperature sensor is used. See
"5.7 Setting up an external temperature sensor" on
page 23.
Offset temperature external outdoor ambient sensor
Only applicable in case of an external outdoor ambient sensor is
installed and configured.
ERHQ+ERLQ011~016 + EHBH/X11+16CB
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P384974-1B – 2017.04
Installer reference guide
73
8 Configuration
You can calibrate the external outdoor ambient temperature sensor.
It is possible to give an offset to the thermistor value. The setting can
be used to compensate for situations where the external outdoor
ambient sensor cannot be installed on the ideal installation location
(see installation).
#
[A.6.5]
Code
[2‑0B]
#
Code
N/A
[9‑0D]
▪ 0: No limitation.
▪ 1~4: General limitation. There is
limitation in all conditions. The
required delta T control and comfort
are NOT guaranteed.
Description
–5°C~5°C, step: 0.5°C (default: 0°C)
▪ 5~8 (default: 6): Limitation when no
actuators. When there is no heating/
cooling output, the pump speed
limitation is applicable. When there is
heating/cooling output, the pump
speed is only determined by delta T in
relation to the required capacity. With
this limitation range, delta T is
possible
and
the
comfort
is
guaranteed.
Forced defrost
You can manually start a defrost operation.
The decision to execute the manual defrost operation is made by the
outdoor unit and depends on ambient and heat exchanger
conditions. When the outdoor unit accepted the forced defrost
operation,
will be displayed on the user interface. If
is NOT
displayed within 6 minutes after forced defrost operation was
enabled, the outdoor unit ignored the forced defrost request.
Code
#
[A.6.6]
N/A
Description
Do you want to start a defrost operation?
Pump operation
Description
Pump speed limitation
The maximum values depend on the unit type:
[9-0D]=0
[9-0D]=5
a (kPa)
a (kPa)
When the pump operation function is disabled the pump will stop if
the outdoor temperature is higher than the value set by [4‑02] or if
the outdoor temperature drops below the value set by [F‑01]. When
the pump operation is enabled, the pump operation is possible at all
outdoor temperatures.
#
N/A
Code
[F‑00]
Description
Pump operation:
▪ 0: Disabled if outdoor temperature is
higher than [4‑02] or lower than [F‑01]
depending
on
heating/cooling
operation mode.
▪ 1:
Possible
temperatures.
at
all
outdoor
b (l/min)
b (l/min)
[9-0D]=6
[9-0D]=7
a (kPa)
a (kPa)
Pump operation during flow abnormality [F‑09] defines whether the
pump stops at flow abnormality or allow to continue operation when
flow abnormality occurs. This functionality is only valid in specific
conditions where it is preferable to keep the pump active when
Ta<4°C (pump will be activated for 10 minutes and deactivated after
10 minutes). Daikin shall NOT be held liable for any damage
resulting this functionality.
#
N/A
Code
[F‑09]
Description
Pump continue operation when flow
abnormality:
▪ 0: Pump will be deactivated.
▪ 1: Pump will be activated when
Ta<4°C (10 minutes ON – 10 minutes
OFF)
b (l/min)
b (l/min)
[9-0D]=8
a (kPa)
Pump speed limitation
Pump speed limitation [9‑0D] defines the maximum pump speed. In
normal conditions, the default setting should NOT be modified. The
pump speed limitation will be overruled when the flow rate is in the
range of the minimum flow (error 7H).
b (l/min)
a
b
Installer reference guide
74
External static pressure
Water flow rate
ERHQ+ERLQ011~016 + EHBH/X11+16CB
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P384974-1B – 2017.04
8 Configuration
8.4
[1]
Menu structure: Overview user settings
Set time/date
Date
Time
Daylight Saving Time
Clock type
[2]
Holiday
<>
Holiday
Holiday mode
From
Until
Use day schedule
Home
[3]
Quiet mode
[4]
Operation mode
[5]
Select schedules
[2]
Holiday
Holiday
Holiday mode
From
Until
Operation mode
Heating
Cooling
DHW
Away
Room temperature
LWT main
LWT additional
Tank temperature
[6]
Information
Sensor information
Energy metering
Error handling
User permission level
Actuators
Operation modes
Running hours
Version
[6.2]
Produced energy
[6.3]
User settings
Display
Temperature lock
Set schedules
Preset values
Allowed operation mode
Unit of measurement
Set weather dependent
Error information
Error history
Contact/helpdesk number
Warning history
[6.8]
[7]
Energy metering
Consumed elec.
Version
User interface
Indoor unit
Outdoor unit
[7.1]
Display
Contrast
Backlit LCD time
User profile
Available home pages
[7.3]
Set schedules
Room temp.
LWT main
LWT additional
DHW temp
Booster heater permission
Quiet mode
DHW pump
[7.4]
Preset values
Room temperature
LWT main
Tank temperature
Quiet level
[7.7]
Set weather dependent
Main
Additional
[7.7.1] Main
Set weather-dependent heating
Set weather-dependent cooling
[7.7.2] Additional
Set weather-dependent heating
Set weather-dependent cooling
INFORMATION
Depending on the selected installer settings, settings will
be visible/invisible.
ERHQ+ERLQ011~016 + EHBH/X11+16CB
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P384974-1B – 2017.04
Installer reference guide
75
8 Configuration
8.5
Menu structure: Overview installer settings
[A] Installer settings
Language
System layout
Space operation
Domestic hot water (DHW)
Heat sources
System operation
Commissioning
Overview settings
[A.2] System layout
Standard
Options
Capacities
Confirm layout
[A.2.1] Standard
Unit type
Compressor type
Indoor software type
Backup heater steps
BUH type
Forced off contact
Unit control method
Number of LWT zones
Pump operation mode
Power saving possible
User interface location
[A.2.2] Options
[A.3] Space operation
LWT settings
Room thermostat
Operation range
DHW operation
DHW tank type
Contact type main
Contact type add.
Digital I/O PCB
Demand PCB
External kWh meter
External kWh meter
DHW pump
External sensor
LAN adapter
[A.3.1] Leaving water
Main
Additional
Delta T source
[A.3.2] Room thermostat
Room temp. range
Room temp. offset
Ext. room sensor offset
Room temp. step
[A.4] Domestic hot water
Type
Disinfection
Maximum setpoint
SP mode
Weather-dependent curve
[A.5] Heat sources
Backup heater
[A.6] System operation
Auto restart
Preferential kWh rate
Pwr consumpt. control
Averaging time
Ext amb. sensor offset
Forced defrost
Emergency
[A.7] Commissioning
Test run
UFH screed dryout
Air purge
Actuator test run
[A.2.2.6] Digital I/O PCB
Ext. backup heat src
Solar kit
Alarm output
Bottom plate heater
[A.3.3] Operation range
Space heating OFF temp
Space cooling On temp
[A.4.4] Disinfection
Disinfection
Operation day
Start time
Temperature target
Duration
[A.3.1.1] Main
LWT setpoint mode
Temperature range
Modulated LWT
Shut-off valve
Emitter type
[A.3.1.2] Additional
LWT setpoint mode
Temperature range
[A.3.1.3] Delta T source
Heating
Cooling
[A.5.1] Backup heater
Operation mode
Enable BUH step 2
Equilibrium temp.
[A.6.2] Prefer. kWh rate PS
Allowed heaters
Forced pump OFF
[A.6.3] Pwr consmp ctrl
Mode
Type
Amp. value
kW value
Amp. limits for DI
kW limits for DI
Priority
INFORMATION
Depending on the selected installer settings, settings will
be visible/invisible.
Installer reference guide
76
ERHQ+ERLQ011~016 + EHBH/X11+16CB
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P384974-1B – 2017.04
9 Commissioning
9
Commissioning
The system is properly earthed and the earth terminals
are tightened.
9.1
Overview: Commissioning
The fuses or locally installed protection devices are
installed according to this document, and have not been
bypassed.
This chapter describes what you have to do and know to
commission the system after it is configured.
The power supply voltage matches the voltage on the
identification label of the unit.
Typical workflow
There are NO loose connections or damaged electrical
components in the switch box.
Commissioning typically consists of the following stages:
1
Checking the "Checklist before commissioning".
2
3
4
Performing an air purge.
Performing a test run for the system.
If necessary, performing a test run for one or more actuators.
5
If necessary, performing an underfloor heating screed dryout.
9.2
There are NO damaged components or squeezed
pipes on the inside of the indoor and outdoor units.
Depending on the backup heater type, backup heater
circuit breaker F1B on the switch box is turned ON.
Only for tanks with built-in booster heater:
The booster heater circuit breaker F2B on the
switch box is turned ON.
Precautions when commissioning
There are NO refrigerant leaks.
INFORMATION
The refrigerant pipes (gas and liquid) are thermally
insulated.
During the first running period of the unit, the required
power may be higher than stated on the nameplate of the
unit. This phenomenon is caused by the compressor, that
needs a continuous run time of 50 hours before reaching
smooth operation and stable power consumption.
The correct pipe size is installed and the pipes are
properly insulated.
There is NO water leak inside the indoor unit.
NOTICE
The shut-off valves are properly installed and fully open.
Before starting up the system, the unit MUST be energised
for at least 6 hours. The crankcase heater needs to heat
up the compressor oil to avoid oil shortage and
compressor breakdown during startup.
The stop valves (gas and liquid) on the outdoor unit are
fully open.
The air purge valve is open (at least 2 turns).
NOTICE
The pressure relief valve purges water when opened.
NEVER operate the unit without thermistors and/or
pressure sensors/switches. Burning of the compressor
might result.
The minimum water volume is guaranteed in all
conditions. See "To check the water volume" in
"6.4 Preparing water piping" on page 25.
NOTICE
Do NOT operate the unit until the refrigerant piping is
complete (when operated this way, the compressor will
break).
9.3
INFORMATION
The software is equipped with an "installer-on-site" mode
([4‑0E]), that disables automatic operation by the unit. At
first installation, setting [4‑0E] is by default set to "1",
meaning automatic operation is disabled. All protective
functions are then disabled. If the user interface home
pages are off, the unit will NOT operate automatically. To
enable automatic operation and the protective functions,
set [4‑0E] to "0".
Checklist before commissioning
Do NOT operate the system before the following checks are OK:
You read the complete installation instructions, as
described in the installer reference guide.
The indoor unit is properly mounted.
36 hours after the first power-on, the unit will automatically
set [4‑0E] to "0", ending "installer-on-site" mode and
enabling the protective functions. If – after first
installation – the installer returns to the site, the installer
has to set [4‑0E] to "1" manually.
The outdoor unit is properly mounted.
The following field wiring has been carried out according
to this document and the applicable legislation:
▪ Between the local supply panel and the outdoor unit
9.4
Checklist during commissioning
▪ Between indoor unit and outdoor unit
▪ Between the local supply panel and the indoor unit
▪ Between the indoor unit and the valves (if applicable)
▪ Between the indoor unit and the room thermostat (if
applicable)
The minimum flow rate during backup heater/defrost
operation is guaranteed in all conditions. See "To check
the water volume and flow rate" in "6.4 Preparing water
piping" on page 25.
To perform an air purge.
▪ Between the indoor unit and the domestic hot water
tank (if applicable)
To perform a test run.
▪ Between the gas boiler and the local supply panel
(only applicable in case of hybrid system)
To perform an actuator test run.
There are NO missing phases or reversed phases.
ERHQ+ERLQ011~016 + EHBH/X11+16CB
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P384974-1B – 2017.04
Installer reference guide
77
9 Commissioning
9.4.1
1
Underfloor screed dryout function
INFORMATION
The underfloor screed dryout function is started (if
necessary).
Start by performing a manual air purge. When almost all
the air is removed, perform an automatic air purge. If
necessary, repeat performing the automatic air purge until
you are sure that all air is removed from the system.
During air purge function, pump speed limitation [9‑0D] is
NOT applicable.
To check the minimum flow rate
Confirm according to the hydraulic configuration which space
heating loops can be closed due to mechanical, electronic, or
other valves.
Make sure that the leaving water temperature home page, room
temperature home page, and domestic hot water home page are
turned OFF.
2
Close all space heating loops that can be closed (see previous
step).
3
Start the pump test run operation (see "9.4.4 To perform an
actuator test run" on page 79).
To perform a manual air purge
Go to [6.1.8]:
> Information > Sensor information > Flow rate
to check the flow rate. During pump test run operation, the unit
can operate below this minimum required flow rate.
Prerequisite: Make sure that the leaving water temperature home
page, room temperature home page, and domestic hot water home
page are turned OFF.
4
Bypass valve foreseen?
Yes
No
Modify the bypass valve setting
to reach the minimum required
flow rate + 2 l/min
In case the actual flow rate is
below the minimum flow rate,
modifications at the hydraulic
configuration are required.
Increase the space heating loops
that can NOT be closed or install
a pressure‑controlled bypass
valve.
The air purge function automatically stops after 30 minutes.
1
Set the user permission level to Installer. See "To set the user
permission level to Installer" on page 49.
2
Set the air purge mode: go to [A.7.3.1]
Commissioning > Air purge > Type.
3
Select Manual and press
4
Go to [A.7.3.4]
> Installer settings > Commissioning > Air
purge > Start air purge and press
to start the air purge
function.
12 l/min
11+16 models
15 l/min
9.4.2
Tue 01:18
Air purge
▪ Automatic: the unit automatically changes the pump speed and
the position of the 3-way valve between the space heating or the
domestic hot water heating mode.
Typical workflow
Purging the air from the system should consist of:
1
Performing a manual air purge
2
Performing an automatic air purge
Scroll
5
Use the and buttons to scroll to Speed.
6
Use the
and
buttons to set the desired pump speed.
Result: Low
Result: High
7
If applicable, set the desired position of the 3-way valve (space
heating/domestic hot water)(space heating/domestic hot water).
Use the and buttons to scroll to Circuit.
8
Use the and buttons to set the desired position of the 3-way
valve (space heating/domestic hot water).
There are 2 modes for purging air:
▪ Manually: the unit will operate with a fixed pump speed and in a
fixed or custom position of the 3-way valve. The custom position
of the 3-way valve is a helpful feature to remove all air from the
water circuit in the space heating or the domestic hot water
heating mode. The operation speed of the pump (slow or quick)
can also be set.
Adjust
Stop
NOTICE
Before starting the air purge, open the safety valve and
check if the circuit is sufficiently filled with water. Only if
water escapes the valve after opening it, you can start the
air purge procedure.
0.5 l/min
Low
SHC
Flow rate
Speed
Circuit
Air purge function
When commissioning and installing the unit, it is very important to
remove all air in the water circuit. When the air purge function is
running, the pump operates without actual operation of the unit and
the removal of air in the water circuit will start.
.
Result: The manual air purge starts and the following screen
appears.
Minimum required flow rate during defrost/backup heater
operation
04+08 models
> Installer settings >
Result: SHC
Result: Tank
To perform an automatic air purge
Prerequisite: Make sure that the leaving water temperature home
page, room temperature home page, and domestic hot water home
page are turned OFF.
1
Set the user permission level to Installer. See "To set the user
permission level to Installer" on page 49.
2
Set the air purge mode: go to [A.7.3.1]
Commissioning > Air purge > Type.
3
Select Automatic and press
4
Go to [A.7.3.4]
> Installer settings > Commissioning > Air
purge > Start air purge and press
to start the air purge
function.
> Installer settings >
.
Result: Air purging will start and the following screen will be
shown.
Installer reference guide
78
ERHQ+ERLQ011~016 + EHBH/X11+16CB
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P384974-1B – 2017.04
9 Commissioning
Tue 01:18
▪ Backup heater (step 2) test
Air purge
Flow rate
Speed
Circuit
▪ Pump test
0.5 l/min
Low
SHC
INFORMATION
Make sure that all air is purged before executing the test
run. Also avoid disturbances in the water circuit during the
test run.
Scroll
Adjust
Stop
To interrupt air purge
1
▪ Backup heater (step 1) test
▪ Solar pump test
Press
and press
purge function.
to confirm the interruption of the air
▪ 2-way valve test
▪ 3-way valve test
9.4.3
To perform a test run
Prerequisite: Make sure that the leaving water temperature home
page, room temperature home page, and domestic hot water home
page are turned OFF.
1
Set the user permission level to Installer. See "To set the user
permission level to Installer" on page 49.
2
Go to [A.7.1]:
run.
> Installer settings > Commissioning > Test
3
Select a test and press
4
Select OK and press
. Example: Heating.
.
Result: The test run starts. It stops automatically when done
(±30 min). To stop it manually, press
, select OK and press
.
INFORMATION
If 2 user interfaces are present, you can start a test run
from both user interfaces.
▪ Bivalent signal test
▪ Alarm output test
▪ Cooling/heating signal test
▪ Quick heat-up test
▪ Circulation pump test
9.4.5
Underfloor heating screed dryout
This function is used for drying out the screed of an underfloor
heating system very slowly during the construction of a house. It
allows the installer to program and execute this program.
Make sure that the leaving water temperature home page, room
temperature home page, and domestic hot water home page are
turned OFF.
▪ The user interface used to start the test run displays a
status screen.
This function can be executed without finishing the outdoor
installation. In this case, the backup heater will perform the screed
dryout and supply the leaving water without heat pump operation.
▪ The other user interface displays a "busy" screen. You
cannot use the user interface as long as the "busy"
screen is shown.
When no outdoor unit is installed yet, then connect the main power
supply cable to the indoor unit via X2M/30 and X2M/31. See
"7.9.9 To connect the main power supply" on page 44.
If the installation of the unit has been done correctly, the unit will
start up during test operation in the selected operation mode. During
the test mode, the correct operation of the unit can be checked by
monitoring leaving water temperature (heating/cooling mode) and
tank temperature (domestic hot water mode).
To monitor the temperature, go to [A.6] and select the information
you want to check.
9.4.4
▪ Bottom plate heater test
To perform an actuator test run
Purpose of the actuator test run is to confirm the operation of the
different actuators (e.g., when you select pump operation, a test run
of the pump will start).
Prerequisite: Make sure that the leaving water temperature home
page, room temperature home page, and domestic hot water home
page are turned OFF.
1
Set the user permission level to Installer. See "To set the user
permission level to Installer" on page 49.
2
Make sure the room temperature control, the leaving water
temperature control and the domestic hot water control are
turned OFF via the user interface.
3
Go to [A.7.4]:
Actuator test run.
> Installer settings > Commissioning >
4
Select an actuator and press
5
Select OK and press
INFORMATION
▪ If Emergency is set to Manual ([A.6.C]=0), and the unit
is triggered to start emergency operation, the user
interface will ask confirmation before starting. The
underfloor heating screed dryout function is active even
if the user does NOT confirm emergency operation.
▪ During underfloor heating screed dryout, pump speed
limitation [9‑0D] is NOT applicable.
NOTICE
The installer is responsible for:
▪ contacting the screed manufacturer for the initial
heating instructions to avoid cracking the screed,
▪ programming the underfloor heating screed dryout
schedule according to the above instruction of the
screed manufacturer,
▪ checking the proper functioning of the setup on a
regular basis,
▪ selecting the correct program complying with the type
of the used screed of the floor.
. Example: Pump.
.
Result: The actuator test run starts. It automatically stops when
finished. To stop it manually, press
, select OK and press
.
Possible actuator test runs
▪ Booster heater test
ERHQ+ERLQ011~016 + EHBH/X11+16CB
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P384974-1B – 2017.04
Installer reference guide
79
9 Commissioning
To perform an underfloor heating screed dryout
NOTICE
To perform an underfloor heating screed dryout, room frost
protection needs to be disabled ([2‑06]=0). By default, it is
enabled ([2‑06]=1). However, due to the "installer-on-site"
mode (see "Checklist before commissioning"), room frost
protection will be automatically disabled for 36 hours after
the first power-on.
If the screed dryout still needs to be performed after the
first 36 hours of power-on, manually disable room frost
protection by setting [2‑06] to "0", and KEEP it disabled
until the screed dryout has finished. Ignoring this notice will
result in cracking of the screed.
NOTICE
For the underfloor heating screed dryout to be able to start,
make sure the following settings are met:
▪ [4‑00]=1
INFORMATION
Preferential kWh rate power supply cannot be used in
combination with underfloor heating screed dryout.
Prerequisite: Make sure there is ONLY 1 user interface connected
to your system to perform an underfloor heating screed dryout.
Prerequisite: Make sure that the leaving water temperature home
page, room temperature home page, and domestic hot water home
page are turned OFF.
> Installer settings > Commissioning > UFH
1
Go to [A.7.2]:
screed dryout.
2
Set a dryout program.
3
Select Start dryout and press
4
Select OK and press
Result: The underfloor heating screed dryout starts and following
screen will be shown. It stops automatically when done. To stop it
manually, press
, select OK and press
.
▪ [C‑02]=0
▪ [D‑01]=0
Tue 15:10
▪ [4‑08]=0
Screed dryout
▪ [4‑01]≠1
The installer can program up to 20 steps. For each step he needs to
enter:
1
the duration in hours, up to 72 hours,
2
the desired leaving water temperature.
24h (1)
To readout the status of an underfloor heating
screed dryout
36h (2)
25°C (1)
A1
Press
2
The current step of the program, the total remaining time, and
the current desired leaving water temperature will be displayed.
INFORMATION
35°C (2)
There is limited access to the menu structure. Only the
following menus can be accessed:
▪ Information.
Desired leaving water temperature (15~55°C)
Duration (1~72 h)
Action step 1
Action step 2
▪ Installer settings > Commissioning > UFH screed
dryout.
To program an underfloor heating screed dryout
schedule
1
Set the user permission level to Installer. See "To set the user
permission level to Installer" on page 49.
2
> Installer settings > Commissioning > UFH
Go to [A.7.2]:
screed dryout > Set dryout schedule.
3
Use the
,
,
, and
to program the schedule.
and
to scroll through the schedule.
▪ Use
and
to adjust the selection.
▪ Use
If a time is selected, you can set the duration between 1 and
72 hours.
If a temperature is selected, you can set the desired leaving
water temperature between 15°C and 55°C.
4
To add a new step, select "–h" or "–" on an empty line and
.
press
5
To delete a step, set the duration to "–" by pressing
6
Press
.
It is important that there is no empty step in the program.
The schedule will stop when a blank step is programmed
OR when 20 consecutive steps have been executed.
80
To interrupt an underfloor heating screed dryout
When the program is stopped by an error, an operation switch off, or
a power failure, the U3 error will be displayed on the user interface.
To resolve the error codes, see "12.4 Solving problems based on
error codes" on page 84. To reset the U3 error, your User
permission level needs to be Installer.
1
Go to the underfloor heating screed dryout screen.
2
Press
.
3
Press
to interrupt the program.
4
Select OK and press
.
Result: The underfloor heating screed dryout program is stopped.
When the program is stopped due to an error, an operation switchoff, or a power failure, you can read out the underfloor heating
screed dryout status.
5
> Installer settings > Commissioning > UFH
Go to [A.7.2]:
screed dryout > Dryout status > Stopped at and followed by the
last executed step.
6
Modify and restart the execution of the program.
to save the schedule.
Installer reference guide
.
1
t
T
t
(1)
(2)
1
14d 12h
25°C
Current step
Remaining
Desired LWT
Stop
Example:
T
.
.
ERHQ+ERLQ011~016 + EHBH/X11+16CB
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P384974-1B – 2017.04
10 Hand-over to the user
Once the test run is finished and the unit operates properly, please
make sure the following is clear for the user:
The heat exchanger of the outdoor unit can get blocked up due to
dust, dirt, leaves, etc. It is recommended to clean the heat
exchanger yearly. A blocked heat exchanger can lead to too low
pressure or too high pressure leading to worse performance.
▪ Fill in the installer setting table (in the operation manual) with the
actual settings.
11.4
▪ Make sure that the user has the printed documentation and ask
him/her to keep it for future reference. Inform the user that he can
find the complete documentation on the url as earlier described in
this manual.
Check the following at least once a year:
10
Hand-over to the user
▪ Explain the user how to properly operate the system and what to
do in case of problems.
▪ Show the user what to do in relation to maintaining the unit.
▪ Explain the user about energy saving tips as described in the
operation manual.
Checklist for yearly maintenance
of the indoor unit
▪ Water pressure
▪ Water filter
▪ Water pressure relief valve
▪ Pressure relief valve of the domestic hot water tank
▪ Switch box
▪ Booster heater of the domestic hot water tank
Water pressure
11
Maintenance and service
NOTICE
Maintenance must be done by an authorised installer or
service agent.
We recommend to do maintenance at least once a year.
However, applicable legislation might require shorter
maintenance intervals.
NOTICE
Check whether the water pressure is above 1 bar. If it is lower, add
water.
Water filter
Clean the water filter.
NOTICE
Handle the water filter with care. Do NOT use excessive
force when you reinsert the water filter so as NOT to
damage the water filter mesh.
In Europe, the greenhouse gas emissions of the total
refrigerant charge in the system (expressed as tonnes
CO2-equivalent) is used to determine the maintenance
intervals. Follow the applicable legislation.
2
Formula to calculate the greenhouse gas emissions:
GWP value of the refrigerant × Total refrigerant charge [in
kg] / 1000
11.1
1
3
4
5
Overview: Maintenance and
service
This chapter contains information about:
▪ The yearly maintenance of the outdoor unit
Water pressure relief valve
▪ The yearly maintenance of the indoor unit
Open the valve and check if it operates correctly. The water may be
very hot!
11.2
Checkpoints are:
Maintenance safety precautions
DANGER: RISK OF ELECTROCUTION
DANGER: RISK OF BURNING
NOTICE: Risk of electrostatic discharge
Before performing any maintenance or service work, touch
a metal part of the unit in order to eliminate static electricity
and to protect the PCB.
11.2.1
Opening the indoor unit
▪ The water flow coming from the relief valve is high enough, no
blockage of the valve or in between piping is suspected.
▪ Dirty water coming out of the relief valve:
▪ open the valve until the discharged water does NOT contain dirt
anymore
▪ flush the system and install an additional water filter (a
magnetic cyclone filter is preferable).
To make sure this water originates from the tank, check after a tank
heat up cycle.
It is recommended to do this maintenance more frequently.
See "7.2.4 To open the switch box cover of the indoor unit" on
page 30.
Relief valve of the domestic hot water tank (field supply)
11.3
Checkpoints are:
Checklist for yearly maintenance
of the outdoor unit
Open the valve and check the correct operation. Water may be very
hot!
▪ The water flow coming from the relief valve is high enough, no
blockage of the valve or in between piping is suspected.
Check the following at least once a year:
▪ Outdoor unit heat exchanger.
ERHQ+ERLQ011~016 + EHBH/X11+16CB
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P384974-1B – 2017.04
Installer reference guide
81
12 Troubleshooting
▪ Dirty water coming out of the relief valve:
WARNING
▪ open the valve until the discharged water does not contain dirt
anymore
Prevent hazard due to the inadvertent resetting of the
thermal cut-out: this appliance must NOT be supplied
through an external switching device, such as a timer, or
connected to a circuit that is regularly turned ON and OFF
by the utility.
▪ flush and clean the complete tank, including the piping between
the relief valve and cold water inlet.
To make sure this water originates from the tank, check after a tank
heat up cycle.
DANGER: RISK OF BURNING
It is recommended to do this maintenance more frequently.
Switch box
12.3
Solving problems based on
symptoms
12.3.1
Symptom: The unit is NOT heating or
cooling as expected
▪ Carry out a thorough visual inspection of the switch box and look
for obvious defects such as loose connections or defective wiring.
▪ Using an ohmmeter, check if contactors K1M, K2M, K3M and K5M
(depending on your installation) operate correctly. All contacts of
these contactors must be in open position when the power is
turned OFF.
WARNING
If the internal wiring is damaged, it has to be replaced by
the manufacturer, its service agent or similarly qualified
persons.
Possible causes
The temperature setting is NOT
correct
Check the temperature setting on
the remote controller. Refer to
the operation manual.
The water flow is too low
Check and make sure that:
▪ All shut-off valves of the water
circuit are completely open.
Booster heater of the domestic hot water tank
INFORMATION
▪ The water filter is clean. Clean
if necessary.
Only for wall-mounted units equipped with a domestic hot
water tank with a built-in electrical booster heater (EKHW).
▪ There is no air in the system.
Purge air if necessary. You
can purge air manually (see
"To perform a manual air
purge" on page 78) or use the
automatic air purge function
(see "To perform an automatic
air purge" on page 78).
It is recommended to remove lime buildup on the booster heater to
extend its life span, especially in regions with hard water. To do so,
drain the domestic hot water tank, remove the booster heater from
the domestic hot water tank and immerse in a bucket (or similar) with
lime-removing product for 24 hours.
12
12.1
Troubleshooting
▪ The water pressure is >1 bar.
▪ The expansion vessel is NOT
broken.
Overview: Troubleshooting
▪ The resistance in the water
circuit is NOT too high for the
pump (see the ESP curve in
the "Technical data" chapter).
This chapter describes what you have to do in case of problems.
It contains information about:
▪ Solving problems based on symptoms
If the problem persists after you
have conducted all of the above
checks, contact your dealer. In
some cases, it is normal that the
unit decides to use a low water
flow.
▪ Solving problems based on error codes
Before troubleshooting
Carry out a thorough visual inspection of the unit and look for
obvious defects such as loose connections or defective wiring.
12.2
Precautions when troubleshooting
WARNING
▪ When carrying out an inspection on the switch box of
the unit, always make sure that the unit is disconnected
from the mains. Turn off the respective circuit breaker.
Corrective action
The water volume in the
installation is too low
Make sure that the water volume
in the installation is above the
minimum required value (see
"6.4.3 To check the water volume
and flow rate" on page 26).
▪ When a safety device was activated, stop the unit and
find out why the safety device was activated before
resetting it. NEVER bridge safety devices or change
their values to a value other than the factory default
setting. If you are unable to find the cause of the
problem, call your dealer.
DANGER: RISK OF ELECTROCUTION
Installer reference guide
82
ERHQ+ERLQ011~016 + EHBH/X11+16CB
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P384974-1B – 2017.04
12 Troubleshooting
12.3.2
Symptom: The compressor does NOT
start (space heating or domestic water
heating)
Possible causes
The unit must start up out of its
operation range (the water
temperature is too low)
Corrective action
If the water temperature is too
low, the unit uses the backup
heater to reach the minimum
water temperature first (15°C).
Check and make sure that:
▪ The power supply to the
backup heater is correctly
wired.
▪ The backup heater thermal
protector is NOT activated.
▪ The backup heater contactors
are NOT broken.
If the problem persists after you
have conducted all of the above
checks, contact your dealer.
Possible causes
Check the installation
requirements.
12.3.5
Symptom: The water pressure relief valve
leaks
Possible causes
Dirt is blocking the water
pressure relief valve outlet
12.3.3
12.3.6
Possible causes
There is air in the system
The water pressure at the pump
inlet is too low
▪ If the water keeps running out
of the unit, close both the
water inlet and outlet shut-off
valves first and then contact
your dealer.
Wait for the power to return (2
hours max.).
Symptom: The pump is making noise
(cavitation)
Corrective action
Symptom: The space is NOT sufficiently
heated at low outdoor temperatures
Possible causes
The backup heater operation is
not activated
Purge air manually (see "To
perform a manual air purge" on
page 78) or use the automatic air
purge function (see "To perform
an automatic air purge" on
page 78).
▪ The water pressure is >1 bar.
▪ The expansion vessel is NOT
broken.
▪ The thermal protector of the
backup heater has not been
activated. If it has, check the
following, and then press the
reset button in the switch box:
▪ The pre-pressure setting of the
expansion vessel is correct
(see "6.4.4 Changing the prepressure of the expansion
vessel" on page 27).
▪ The water pressure
▪ Whether there is air in the
system
Symptom: The pressure relief valve opens
Corrective action
The expansion vessel is broken
Replace the expansion vessel.
The water volume in the
installation is too high
Make sure that the water volume
in the installation is below the
maximum allowed value (see
"6.4.3 To check the water volume
and flow rate" on page 26 and
"6.4.4 Changing the pre-pressure
of the expansion vessel" on
page 27).
ERHQ+ERLQ011~016 + EHBH/X11+16CB
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P384974-1B – 2017.04
▪ The backup heater operation
mode is enabled. Go to:
▪ The backup heater overcurrent
fuse has not been turned off. If
it has, check the fuse and turn
it back on.
Check and make sure that:
Possible causes
Corrective action
Check and make sure that:
▪ [A.5.1.1] > Installer settings
> Heat sources > Backup
heater > Operation mode
[4‑00]
▪ The manometer is not broken.
12.3.4
Corrective action
Check whether the pressure
relief valve works correctly by
turning the red knob on the valve
counterclockwise:
▪ If you do NOT hear a clacking
sound, contact your dealer.
The preferential kWh rate power This should match with the
supply settings and electrical
connections as explained in
connections do NOT match
"6.5 Preparing electrical
wiring" on page 28 and "7.9.9 To
connect the main power
supply" on page 44.
The preferential kWh rate signal
was sent by the electricity
company
Corrective action
The water circuit head is too high The water circuit head is the
difference in height between the
indoor unit and the highest point
of the water circuit. If the indoor
unit is located at the highest
point of the installation, the
installation height is considered
0 m. The maximum water circuit
head is 10 m.
▪ The air purge operation
The backup heater equilibrium
temperature has not been
configured correctly
Increase the "equilibrium
temperature" to activate the
backup heater operation at a
higher outdoor temperature. Go
to:
▪ [A.5.1.4] > Installer settings >
Heat sources > Backup heater
> Equilibrium temp. OR
▪ [A.8] > Installer settings >
Overview settings [5‑01]
Installer reference guide
83
12 Troubleshooting
Possible causes
Corrective action
There is air in the system.
Purge air manually or
automatically. See the air purge
function in the "Commissioning"
chapter.
Too much heat pump capacity is
used for heating domestic hot
water (applies only to
installations with a domestic hot
water tank)
Check and make sure that the
"space heating priority" settings
have been configured
appropriately:
▪ Make sure that the "space
heating priority status" has
been enabled. Go to [A.8] >
Installer settings > Overview
settings [5‑02]
▪ Increase the "space heating
priority
temperature"
to
activate
backup
heater
operation at a higher outdoor
temperature. Go to [A.8] >
Installer settings > Overview
settings [5‑03]
12.3.7
Symptom: The pressure at the tapping
point is temporarily unusually high
Possible causes
Corrective action
Failing or blocked pressure relief ▪ Flush and clean the complete
valve.
tank including the piping
between pressure relief valve
and the cold water inlet.
▪ Replace the pressure relief
valve.
12.3.8
Possible causes
12.4
When a problem happens, an error code appears on the user
interface. It is important to understand the problem and to take
countermeasure before resetting the error code. This should be
done by a licensed installer or by your local dealer.
This chapter gives you an overview of all error codes and the
content of the error code as it appears on the user interface.
For a more detailed troubleshooting guideline for each error, please
see the service manual.
12.4.1
Error codes: Overview
Error codes of the indoor unit
Error code
Detailed error
code
Description
7H
01
Water flow problem.
7H
04
Water flow problem during
domestic hot water production.
Manual reset.
Check the domestic hot water
circuit.
Corrective action
Failing or blocked pressure relief Contact your local dealer.
valve.
Do NOT press the
button
while the disinfection function is
active.
Solving problems based on error
codes
Symptom: Decoration panels are pushed
away due to a swollen tank
Possible causes
Corrective action
The disinfection operation was
stopped manually: with the user
interface displaying the DHW
home page and its user
permission level set to Installer,
the
button was pressed
during disinfection operation.
7H
05
Water flow problem during
heating/sampling.
Manual reset.
12.3.9
Symptom: Tank disinfection function is
NOT completed correctly (AH-error)
Check the space heating/cooling
circuit.
7H
Possible causes
The disinfection function was
Program the start-up of the
interrupted by domestic hot water disinfection function when the
tapping
coming 4 hours NO domestic hot
water tapping is expected.
Large domestic hot water tapping
happened recently before the
programmed start-up of the
disinfection function
When the Domestic hot water >
Type > Reheat or Reheat +
sched. is selected, it is
recommended to program the
start-up the disinfection function
at least 4 hours later than the last
expected large hot water tapping.
This start-up can be set by
installer settings (disinfection
function).
When the Domestic hot water >
Type > Scheduled only is
selected, it is recommended to
program a Storage eco 3 hours
before the scheduled start-up of
the disinfection function to
preheat the tank.
Installer reference guide
84
06
Corrective action
Water flow problem during
cooling/defrost.
Manual reset.
Check the plate heat exchanger.
80
00
Returning water temperature
sensor problem.
Please contact your dealer.
81
00
Leaving water temperature
sensor problem.
Please contact your dealer.
89
01
Heat exchanger frozen.
89
02
Heat exchanger frozen.
89
03
Heat exchanger frozen.
ERHQ+ERLQ011~016 + EHBH/X11+16CB
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P384974-1B – 2017.04
12 Troubleshooting
Error code
Detailed error
code
Description
Error code
Detailed error
code
Description
8F
00
Abnormal increase outlet
U4
00
Indoor/outdoor unit
water temperature (DHW).
8H
00
Abnormal increase outlet
communication problem.
U5
00
User interface
water temperature.
8H
03
Overheating water circuit
communication problem.
U8
01
UA
00
Connection with adapter lost
(thermostat).
Please contact your dealer.
A1
00
Zero cross detection problem.
Indoor unit, outdoor unit
Power reset required.
matching problem.
Please contact your dealer.
A1
01
EEPROM reading error.
AA
01
Backup heater overheated.
Power reset required.
Please contact your dealer.
AC
00
Booster heater overheated.
Please contact your dealer.
AH
00
Tank disinfection function not
completed correctly.
AJ
03
Too long DHW heat-up time
required.
C0
C4
00
00
02
17
INFORMATION
In case of error code AH and no interruption of the
disinfection function occurred due to domestic hot water
tapping, following actions are recommended:
▪ When the Domestic hot water > Type > Reheat or
Reheat + sched. is selected, it is recommended to
program the start-up of the disinfection function at least
4 hours later than the last expected large hot water
tapping. This start-up can be set by installer settings
(disinfection function).
▪ When the Domestic hot water > Type > Scheduled only
is selected, it is recommended to program a Storage
eco 3 hours before the scheduled start-up of the
disinfection function to preheat the tank.
NOTICE
Please contact your dealer.
When the minimum water flow is lower than described in
the table below, the unit will temporarily stop operation and
the user interface will display error 7H‑01. After some time,
this error will reset automatically and the unit will resume
operation.
Heat exchanger temperature
Please contact your dealer.
Minimum required flow during heat pump operation
Room temperature sensor
04 models
problem.
Please contact your dealer.
EC
00
00
08 models
Abnormal increase tank
temperature.
H1
External temperature
11 models
16 models
sensor problem.
HC
00
00
Heating
6 l/min
Cooling
6 l/min
Heating
6 l/min
Cooling
10 l/min
Heating
10 l/min
Cooling
15 l/min
Heating
10 l/min
Cooling
15 l/min
Please contact your dealer.
Minimum required flow during defrost operation
Tank temperature sensor
04+08 models
12 l/min
problem.
11+16 models
15 l/min
Please contact your dealer.
U3
Tank type problem
Flow sensor/switch malfunction.
sensor problem.
CJ
Power reset required.
UA
Under floor heating screed
Minimum required flow during backup heater operation
All models
12 l/min
dryout function not completed
correctly.
ERHQ+ERLQ011~016 + EHBH/X11+16CB
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P384974-1B – 2017.04
If the 7H‑01 error persists, the unit will stop operation and the user
interface will display an error code that needs to be reset manually.
Depending on the problem, this error code is different:
Installer reference guide
85
13 Disposal
Error code
Detailed error
code
Description
7H
04
The water flow problems mainly
occurred during domestic hot
water operation. Check the
domestic hot water circuit.
7H
05
The water flow problems mainly
occurred during space heating
operation. Check the space
heating circuit.
7H
06
The water flow problems mainly
occurred during cooling/defrost
operation. Check the space
heating/cooling circuit.
Additionally, this error code might
be an indication of frost damage
to the plate heat exchanger. In
that case, contact your local
dealer.
13.3
DANGER: RISK OF EXPLOSION
Pump down – Refrigerant leakage. If you want to pump
down the system, and there is a leakage in the refrigerant
circuit:
▪ Do NOT use the unit's automatic pump down function,
with which you can collect all refrigerant from the
system into the outdoor unit. Possible consequence:
Self-combustion and explosion of the compressor
because of air going into the operating compressor.
▪ Use a separate recovery system so that the unit's
compressor does NOT have to operate.
1
Turn ON the main power supply switch.
2
Make sure the liquid stop valve and the gas stop valve are
open.
3
Press the pump down button (BS4) for at least 8 seconds. BS4
is located on the PCB in the outdoor unit (see wiring diagram).
INFORMATION
Error AJ-03 is reset automatically from the moment there is
a normal tank heat-up.
13
Result: The
automatically.
4
NOTICE
13.1
compressor
and
outdoor
unit
fan
start
Once operation stops (after 3~5 minutes), close the liquid stop
valve and the gas stop valve.
Result: The pump down operation is finished. The user
interface may display " " and the indoor pump may continue
operating. This is NOT a malfunction. Even if you press the ON
button on the user interface, the unit will NOT start. To restart
the unit, turn OFF the main power supply switch and turn it ON
again.
Disposal
Do not try to dismantle the system yourself: the dismantling
of the system, treatment of the refrigerant, oil and other
parts must comply with applicable legislation. Units must
be treated at a specialised treatment facility for reuse,
recycling and recovery.
To pump down
5
Turn OFF the main power supply switch.
NOTICE
Make sure to reopen both stop valves before restarting the
unit.
Overview: Disposal
Typical workflow
Disposing of the system typically consists of the following stages:
1
Pumping down the system.
2
Bringing the system to a specialized treatment facility.
INFORMATION
For more details, see the service manual.
13.2
About pump down
The unit is equipped with an automatic pump down function, with
which you can collect all refrigerant from the system into the outdoor
unit.
NOTICE
The outdoor unit is equipped with a low pressure switch or
a low pressure sensor to protect the compressor by turning
it OFF. NEVER short-circuit the low pressure switch during
pump down operation.
Before pumping down
NOTICE
Before you pump down, make sure the water temperature
(example: by performing a heating operation) and water
volume (example: by opening all heat emitters) are
sufficiently high. Pump down is done in cooling mode.
Installer reference guide
86
ERHQ+ERLQ011~016 + EHBH/X11+16CB
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P384974-1B – 2017.04
14 Technical data
14
Technical data
A subset of the latest technical data is available on the regional Daikin website (publicly accessible). The full set of latest technical data is
available on the Daikin extranet (authentication required).
14.1
Service space: Outdoor unit
) | Single row of units (
Single unit (
)
A~E
ERHQ
eB
E
eD
e
HU
C
c
b
d
D
B
a
HD
HB
HB HD HU
(mm)
a
b
c
B
—
≥100
A, B, C
—
≥100 ≥100 ≥100
B, E
—
≥100
A, B, C, E
—
≥150 ≥150 ≥150
D
—
D, E
—
B, D
—
B, D, E
HB<HD
d
e
eB
eD
≥1000
≤500
≥1000
≤500
≥500
≥500 ≥1000 ≤500
≥100
≥500
HB≤½HU
≥250
≥750 ≥1000 ≤500
½HU<HB≤HU
≥250
≥1000 ≥1000 ≤500
HD≤½HU
≥100
≥1000 ≥1000
≤500
½HU<HD≤HU
≥200
≥1000 ≥1000
≤500
≥1000
≤500
HB>HU
HB>HD
A
1
HD>HU
eB
eD
E
e
>300
C
HU
c
>300
b
B
A, B, C
—
≥200 ≥300 ≥1000
A, B, C, E
—
≥200 ≥300 ≥1000
D
—
D, E
—
B, D
HB <HD
—
≥300
≥1000
HB >HD
HD≤½HU
≥250
≥1500
½HU<HD≤HU
≥300
≥1500
HB≤½HU
≥300
≥1000 ≥1000 ≤500
½HU<HB≤HU
≥300
≥1250 ≥1000 ≤500
HD≤½HU
≥250
≥1500 ≥1000
≤500
½HU<HD≤HU
≥300
≥1500 ≥1000
≤500 1+2
HB
B, D, E
D
HB<HD
d
HD
a
≥1000
≥1000 ≥1000 ≤500
1
HB>HU
A
HB>HD
HD>HU
A,B,C,D
E
a,b,c,d,e
eB
eD
HU
HB,HD
1
2
Obstacles (walls/baffle plates)
Obstacle (roof)
Minimum service space between the unit and obstacles A, B, C, D and E
Maximum distance between the unit and the edge of obstacle E, in the direction of obstacle B
Maximum distance between the unit and the edge of obstacle E, in the direction of obstacle D
Height of the unit
Height of obstacles B and D
Seal the bottom of the installation frame to prevent discharged air from flowing back to the suction side through the bottom of the unit.
Maximum two units can be installed.
Not allowed
ERHQ+ERLQ011~016 + EHBH/X11+16CB
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P384974-1B – 2017.04
Installer reference guide
87
14 Technical data
A~E
ERLQ
eB
E
eD
e
HU
C
c
d
D
B
b
HB
(mm)
HB HD HU
a
b
c
B
—
≥200
A, B, C
—
≥200 ≥200 ≥200
B, E
—
≥200
A, B, C, E
—
≥300 ≥300 ≥300
D
—
D, E
—
B, D
—
B, D, E
HB<HD
d
e
eB
eD
≥1000
≤500
≥1000
≤500
1
≥500
≥500 ≥1000 ≤500
≥200
≥500
HB≤½HU
≥350
≥750 ≥1000 ≤500
½HU<HB≤HU
≥350
≥1000 ≥1000 ≤500
HD≤½HU
≥200
≥1000 ≥1000
≤500
½HU<HD≤HU
≥300
≥1000 ≥1000
≤500
HB>HU
a
HB>HD
A
HD
HD>HU
A,B,C,D
E
a,b,c,d,e
eB
eD
HU
HB,HD
1
Obstacles (walls/baffle plates)
Obstacle (roof)
Minimum service space between the unit and obstacles A, B, C, D and E
Maximum distance between the unit and the edge of obstacle E, in the direction of obstacle B
Maximum distance between the unit and the edge of obstacle E, in the direction of obstacle D
Height of the unit
Height of obstacles B and D
Recommended to prevent exposure to wind and snow.
Not allowed
)
Multiple rows of units (
≥300
≥300
≥100
ERHQ
≥300
≥300
HB
b
≥2000
≥300
≥200
≥1000
HB HU
b (mm)
HB≤½HU
b≥250
½HU<HB≤HU
b≥300
HB>HU
≥3000
≥300
HU
≥600
≥1500
ERLQ
14.2
Piping diagram: Outdoor unit
ERHQ_V3
R1T
e
Y1E
M1F-M2F
e
f
R6T
R5T
R4T
S1NPH
Y1S
S1PH
R2T
R3T
a
b
M1C
c
c
g
E1HC
d
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
E1HC
M1C
M1F‑M2F
R1T
R2T
R3T
R4T
R5T
R6T
S1NPH
S1PH
Y1E
Y1S
Field piping (liquid: Ø9.5 flare connection)
Field piping (gas: Ø15.9 flare connection)
Stop valve (with service port 5/16")
Accumulator
Filter
Heat exchanger
Internal service port 5/16"
Crankcase heater
Motor (compressor)
Motor (upper and lower fan)
Thermistor (air)
Thermistor (discharge)
Thermistor (suction)
Thermistor (heat exchanger)
Thermistor (heat exchanger middle)
Thermistor (liquid)
Pressure sensor
High pressure switch
Electronic expansion valve
Solenoid valve (4‑way valve)
Heating
Cooling
3TW57765-1A
ERHQ_W1
Installer reference guide
88
ERHQ+ERLQ011~016 + EHBH/X11+16CB
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P384974-1B – 2017.04
14 Technical data
R1T
Y1E
e
R6T
M1F-M2F
e
f
Y3S
R5T
R4T
S1NPH
Y1S
h
R3T
c
a
M1C
c
b
R2T
S1PH
g
E1HC
d
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
E1HC
M1C
M1F‑M2F
R1T
R2T
R3T
R4T
R5T
R6T
S1NPH
S1PH
Y1E
Y1S
Y3S
Field piping (liquid: Ø9.5 flare connection)
Field piping (gas: Ø15.9 flare connection)
Stop valve (with service port 5/16")
Accumulator
Filter
Heat exchanger
Internal service port 5/16"
Capillary tube
Crankcase heater
Motor (compressor)
Motor (upper and lower fan)
Thermistor (air)
Thermistor (discharge)
Thermistor (suction)
Thermistor (heat exchanger)
Thermistor (heat exchanger middle)
Thermistor (liquid)
Pressure sensor
High pressure switch
Electronic expansion valve
Solenoid valve (4‑way valve)
Solenoid valve (injection)
Heating
Cooling
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
E1HC
M1C
M1F‑M2F
R1T
R2T
R3T
R4T
R5T
R6T
S1NPH
S1PH
Y1E
Y3E
Y1S
Y3S
Field piping (liquid: Ø9.5 flare connection)
Field piping (gas: Ø15.9 flare connection)
Stop valve (with service port 5/16")
Accumulator
Filter
Heat exchanger
Internal service port 5/16"
Capillary tube
Crankcase heater
Motor (compressor)
Motor (upper and lower fan)
Thermistor (air)
Thermistor (discharge)
Thermistor (suction)
Thermistor (heat exchanger)
Thermistor (heat exchanger middle)
Thermistor (liquid)
Pressure sensor
High pressure switch
Electronic expansion valve (main)
Electronic expansion valve (injection)
Solenoid valve (4‑way valve)
Solenoid valve (hot gas pass)
Heating
Cooling
3TW57915-1A
ERLQ
R1T
Y1E
e
R6T
h
M1F-M2F
e
f
Y3E
R5T
R4T
S1NPH
Y1S
R3T
S1PH
R2T
g
M1C
a
b
c
c
E1HC
d
e
Y3S
3TW60335-1A
ERHQ+ERLQ011~016 + EHBH/X11+16CB
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P384974-1B – 2017.04
Installer reference guide
89
14 Technical data
14.3
Piping diagram: Indoor unit
Water side
Refrigerant side
Air purge
Field installed
Water
outlet
Pump
Refrigerant outlet
R1T
R2T
Flow sensor
Refrigerant inlet
Safety
valve
Plate heat
exchanger
Shut-off valve
with drain/fill valve
Manometer
Backup heater
Evaporator
Condenser
Expansion vessel
Field installed
Filter
R4T
Water
inlet
R3T Refrigerant inlet
Refrigerant outlet
Shut-off valve
with drain/fill valve
LEGEND
Check valve
Screw connection
Flare connection
Quick coupling
Spinned pipe
Flange connection
Pinched pipe
Brazed connection
Thermistor
R4T
R3T
R2T
R1T
Description
Inlet water thermistor
Refrigerant liquid side thermistor
Outlet water backup heater thermistor
Outlet water heat exchanger thermistor
3D088485
Installer reference guide
90
ERHQ+ERLQ011~016 + EHBH/X11+16CB
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P384974-1B – 2017.04
14 Technical data
14.4
Wiring diagram: Outdoor unit
The wiring diagram is delivered with the unit, located at the inside of
the service cover.
F1U~F9U
(ERHQ_W1 + ERLQ_W1) ▪ F3U~F6U: Fuse (T 6.3 A / 250 V)
Notes:
▪ F7U: Fuse (T 5.0 A / 250 V)
1
This wiring diagram applies only to the outdoor unit.
2
Symbols (see below).
H1P~H7P (A2P)
3
Symbols (see below).
(ERHQ_V3 + ERLQ_V3)
4
Refer to the option manual for connecting wiring to X6A and
X77A.
5
Refer to the wiring diagram sticker (on the back of the service
cover) for how to use the BS1~BS4 and DS1 switches.
6
When operating, do not short-circuit protective device S1PH.
▪ F8U, F9U: Fuse (F 1.0 A / 250 V)
Colours (see below).
8
Refer to the service manual for instructions on how to set the
selector switches (DS1). The factory setting of all switches is
OFF.
Symbols (see below).
Symbols:
Light‑emitting diode (service monitor
orange)
H2P:
▪ Prepare, test: Flickering
▪ Malfunction detection: Light up
H1P~H7P (A1P)
(ERHQ_W1 + ERLQ_W1)
7
9
▪ F1U, F2U: Fuse (31.5 A / 500 V)
HAP (A1P)
(ERHQ_V3 + ERLQ_V3)
HAP (A1P, A2P)
(ERHQ_W1 + ERLQ_W1)
K1M, K2M
Light‑emitting diode (service monitor
orange)
Light‑emitting diode (service monitor
green)
Light‑emitting diode (service monitor
green)
Magnetic contactor
L
Live
(ERHQ_W1 + ERLQ_W1)
N
Neutral
K1R~K4R
Magnetic relay
Field wiring
K10R, K11R
Magnetic relay
Terminal strip
(ERHQ_V3 + ERLQ_V3)
Connector
L1R~L4R
Reactor
Connector
M1C
Motor (compressor)
Connection
M1F
Motor (upper fan)
Protective earth (screw)
M2F
Motor (lower fan)
PS
Switching power supply
Q1DI
Earth leakage circuit breaker (field
supply)
Option
R1~R4
Resistor
Wiring dependent on model
R1T
Thermistor (air)
R2T
Thermistor (discharge)
R3T
Thermistor (suction)
R4T
Thermistor (heat exchanger)
R5T
Thermistor (heat exchanger middle)
R6T
Thermistor (liquid)
R7T
Thermistor (fin)
Noiseless earth
Terminal
Colours:
BLK
Black
BLU
Blue
BRN
Brown
GRN
Green
ORG
Orange
RED
Red
WHT
White
YLW
Yellow
(ERHQ_W1 + ERLQ_W1)
R10T
Thermistor (fin)
(ERHQ_V3 + ERLQ_V3)
RC
Legend:
Signal receiver circuit
(ERHQ_V3 + ERLQ_V3)
A1P~A4P
Printed circuit board
S1NPH
Pressure sensor
BS1~BS4
Push button switch
S1PH
High pressure switch
C1~C4
Capacitor
TC
Signal transmission circuit
DS1
DIP switch
(ERHQ_V3 + ERLQ_V3)
E1H
Bottom plate heater
V1R
E1HC
Crankcase heater
F1U~F8U
▪ F1U, F3U, F4U: Fuse (T 6.3 A /
250 V)
(ERHQ_V3 + ERLQ_V3)
▪ F6U: Fuse (T 5.0 A / 250 V)
▪ F7U, F8U: Fuse (F 1.0 A / 250 V)
Power module
(ERHQ_V3 + ERLQ_V3)
V1R, V2R
Power module
(ERHQ_W1 + ERLQ_W1)
V2R, V3R
Diode module
(ERHQ_V3 + ERLQ_V3)
V3R
Diode module
(ERHQ_W1 + ERLQ_W1)
ERHQ+ERLQ011~016 + EHBH/X11+16CB
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P384974-1B – 2017.04
Installer reference guide
91
14 Technical data
V1T
Insulated gate bipolar transistor (IGBT)
Y3E
Expansion valve (injection)
(ERLQ)
(ERHQ_V3 + ERLQ_V3)
X1M
Terminal strip (power supply)
Y1S
Solenoid valve (4‑way valve)
X1Y
Connector (option for ERHQ: bottom
plate heater)
Y3S
Solenoid valve (injection)
X6A
Connector (option)
X77A
Connector (option)
(ERHQ_W1 + ERLQ_W1)
Y1E
Expansion valve (main)
14.5
(ERHQ_W1)
Y3S
Solenoid valve (hot gas pass)
(ERLQ)
Z1C~Z9C
Noise filter
Z1F~Z4F
Noise filter
Wiring diagram: Indoor unit
See the internal wiring diagram supplied with the unit (on the inside of the indoor unit switch box cover). The abbreviations used are listed
below.
Notes to go through before starting the unit
English
Translation
English
Translation
Heat pump convector
Heat pump convector
Add LWT
Additional leaving water
temperature
Notes to go through before
starting the unit
Notes to go through before
starting the unit
X1M
Main terminal
On/OFF thermostat (wired)
On/OFF thermostat (wired)
X2M
Field wiring terminal for AC
On/OFF thermostat (wireless)
On/OFF thermostat (wireless)
X5M
Field wiring terminal for DC
Ext. thermistor
External thermistor
X6M, X7M
Backup heater terminal
Heat pump convector
Heat pump convector
Booster heater terminal
Position in switch box
X4M
Earth wiring
15
Wire number 15
English
Translation
Position in switch box
Position in switch box
Field supply
**/12.2
Connection ** continues on page
12 column 2
Legend
A1P
Main PCB
Several wiring possibilities
A2P
User interface PCB
Option
A3P
*
Solar pump station PCB
Not mounted in switch box
A3P
*
On/OFF thermostat (PC=power circuit)
Wiring depending on model
A3P
*
Heat pump convector
PCB
A4P
*
Digital I/O PCB
Backup heater configuration
(only for *9W)
Backup heater configuration
(only for *9W)
A4P
*
Receiver PCB (Wireless On/OFF
thermostat)
3V3 (1N~, 230 V, 3 kW)
3V3 (1N~, 230 V, 3 kW)
A5P
6V3 (1N~, 230 V, 6 kW)
6V3 (1N~, 230 V, 6 kW)
A8P
6WN (3N~, 400 V, 6 kW)
6WN (3N~, 400 V, 6 kW)
B1L
9WN (3N~, 400 V, 9 kW)
9WN (3N~, 400 V, 9 kW)
BSK (A3P)
*
Solar pump station relay
6T1 (3~, 230 V, 6 kW)
DS1 (A8P)
*
DIP switch
1
6T1 (3~, 230 V, 6 kW)
Anode driver PCB
*
Demand PCB
Flow sensor
User installed options
User installed options
E1A
Electrical anode
Bottom plate heater
Bottom plate heater
E1H
Backup heater element (1 kW)
Domestic hot water tank
Domestic hot water tank
E2H
Backup heater element (2 kW)
Domestic hot water tank with
solar connection
Domestic hot water tank with
solar connection
E3H
E4H
Remote user interface
Remote user interface
F1B
Ext. indoor thermistor
External indoor thermistor
F2B
Ext outdoor thermistor
External outdoor thermistor
F1T
Digital I/O PCB
Digital I/O PCB
F1U, F2U (A4P)
Demand PCB
Demand PCB
Solar pump and control station
Solar pump and control station
Main LWT
Main leaving water temperature
On/OFF thermostat (wired)
On/OFF thermostat (wired)
On/OFF thermostat (wireless)
On/OFF thermostat (wireless)
Ext. thermistor
External thermistor
Installer reference guide
92
Backup heater element (3 kW)
*
*
Overcurrent fuse booster heater
Thermal fuse backup heater
*
FU1 (A1P)
Fuse 5 A 250 V for digital I/O PCB
Fuse T 6.3 A 250 V for PCB
K1M, K2M
K3M
Booster heater (3 kW)
Overcurrent fuse backup heater
Contactor backup heater
*
Contactor booster heater
K5M
Safety contactor backup heater (only for
*9W)
K*R (A1P, A4P)
Relay on PCB
ERHQ+ERLQ011~016 + EHBH/X11+16CB
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P384974-1B – 2017.04
14 Technical data
M1P
Main supply pump
English
Use normal kWh rate power
supply for indoor unit
(2) Backup heater power supply
(2) Backup heater power supply
Only for ***
Only for ***
Power circuit
(3) User interface
(3) User interface
Only for remote user interface
option
Only for remote user interface
option
Switch box
Switch box
(4) Domestic hot water tanks
(4) Domestic hot water tanks
3 wire type SPST
3 wire type SPST
Booster heater power supply
Booster heater power supply
Only for ***
Only for ***
Only for wall-mounted models
Only for wall-mounted models
Switch box
Switch box
(5) Ext. thermistor
(5) External thermistor
Switch box
Switch box
(6) Field supplied options
(6) Field supplied options
#
Domestic hot water pump
M2S
#
2-way valve for cooling mode
M3S
(*) 3-way valve for floor heating/domestic hot
water
PC (A4P)
PHC1 (A4P)
*
Optocoupler input circuit
Q*DI
#
Earth leakage circuit breaker
Q1L
Thermal protector backup heater
Q2L
*
Thermal protector booster heater
R1H (A3P)
*
Humidity sensor
R1T (A1P)
Outlet water heat exchanger thermistor
R1T (A2P)
Ambient sensor user interface
R1T (A3P)
*
R2T (A1P)
Ambient sensor On/OFF thermostat
Outlet backup heater thermistor
R2T (A3P)
*
Translation
Use normal kWh rate power
supply for indoor unit
M2P
External sensor (floor or ambient)
R3T
Refrigerant liquid side thermistor
R4T
Inlet water thermistor
R5T
(*) Domestic hot water thermistor
12 V DC pulse detection (voltage 12 V DC pulse detection (voltage
supplied by PCB)
supplied by PCB)
R6T
*
External indoor or outdoor ambient
thermistor
230 V AC supplied by PCB
230 V AC supplied by PCB
Continuous
Continuous current
S1S
#
Preferential kWh rate power supply contact
DHW pump output
Domestic hot water pump output
S2S
#
Electrical meter pulse input 1
DHW pump
Domestic hot water pump
S3S
#
Electrical meter pulse input 2
Electrical meters
Electrical meters
S4S
#
Safety thermostat
For safety thermostat
For safety thermostat
S6S~S9S
#
Digital power limitation inputs
Inrush
Inrush current
SS1 (A4P)
*
Selector switch
Max. load
Maximum load
TR1
Power supply transformer
Normally closed
Normally closed
CN1-2, X*A
Connector
Normally open
Normally open
Terminal strip
Safety thermostat contact: 16 V
DC detection (voltage supplied
by PCB)
Safety thermostat contact:
16 V DC detection (voltage
supplied by PCB)
Shut-off valve
Shut-off valve
SWB
Switch box
(7) Option PCBs
(7) Option PCBs
Black
Alarm output
Alarm output
BRN
Brown
Changeover to ext. heat source
GRY
Grey
Changeover to external heat
source
RED
Red
If no bottom plate heater
If no bottom plate heater
Max. load
Maximum load
Min. load
Minimum load
Only for bottom plate heater
Only for bottom plate heater
X1H, X*Y
X*M
*:
(*):
#:
Optional
Standard for EHVH/X, optional for EHBH/X
Field supply
Colours
BLK
Translation of text on wiring diagram
English
Translation
(1) Main power connection
(1) Main power connection
Only for demand PCB option
Only for demand PCB option
For preferential kWh rate power
supply
For preferential kWh rate power
supply
Only for digital I/O PCB option
Only for digital I/O PCB option
Only for solar pump station
Only for solar pump station
Indoor unit supplied from outdoor Indoor unit supplied from outdoor
Normal kWh rate power supply
Normal kWh rate power supply
Only for normal power supply
(standard)
Only for normal power supply
(standard)
Only for preferential kWh rate
power supply (outdoor)
Only for preferential kWh rate
power supply (outdoor)
Outdoor unit
Outdoor unit
Preferential kWh rate power
supply contact: 16 V DC
detection (voltage supplied by
PCB)
Preferential kWh rate power
supply contact: 16 V DC
detection (voltage supplied by
PCB)
ERHQ+ERLQ011~016 + EHBH/X11+16CB
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P384974-1B – 2017.04
Options: bottom plate heater OR Options: bottom plate heater OR
On/OFF output
On/OFF output
Options: ext. heat source output, Options: external heat source
solar pump connection, alarm
output, solar pump connection,
output
alarm output
Outdoor unit
Outdoor unit
Power limitation digital inputs: 12 Power limitation digital inputs:
V DC / 12 mA detection (voltage 12 V DC / 12 mA detection
supplied by PCB)
(voltage supplied by PCB)
Refer to operation manual
Refer to operation manual
Solar pump connection
Solar pump connection
Installer reference guide
93
14 Technical data
English
English
Translation
Translation
Space C/H On/OFF output
Space cooling/heating On/OFF
output
Main LWT zone
Main leaving water temperature
zone
Switch box
Switch box
To bottom plate heater
To bottom plate heater
Only for external sensor (floor/
ambient)
Only for external sensor (floor or
ambient)
Only for heat pump convector
Only for heat pump convector
Only for wired thermostat
Only for wired thermostat
Only for wireless thermostat
Only for wireless thermostat
(8) External On/OFF thermostats (8) External On/OFF thermostats
and heat pump convector
and heat pump convector
Additional leaving water
temperature zone
Additional LWT zone
Electrical connection diagram
For more details, please check the unit wiring.
Power supply
Standard part
1 Only for normal power supply installation
unit power supply: 400 V or 230 V + earth
Notes:
- In case of signal cable: keep minimum distance to power cables > 5 cm
- Available heaters depending on model: see combination table
5 or 3 core
Outdoor unit
1 Only for preferential kWh rate power supply installation
unit preferential kWh rate power supply
400 V or 230 V + earth:
5 or 3 core
3 core
normal kWh rate power supply for indoor unit: 230 V
2
Bottom plate heater
X1Y: 1-2
2 core
Only for *KBPHT*
& depending on model
X1M: 1-2-3
Preferential kWh rate power supply contact
Field supply
2
X1M: L1-L2-L3-N-earth
or L-N-earth
3 core
Safety thermostat
2 core
2x0.75
Optional parts (*KHW*)
4 or 3
core
booster heater power supply (3 kW): 230 V + earth
X1M: 1-2-3
X2M: 30-31
3 core
Domestic hot
water tank
A4P:Y2
X2M:29
2 core
A4P: Y3
X2M: 29
Solar input
2 core
A4P: X1-X2
Changeover to
ext. heat source output
2 core
A4P: Y2
X2M: 29
Cooling/heating
On/OFF output
2 core
X5M: 3-4
F1B: L1-L2-L3
or L-N + earth
F2B: L-N + earth
2 core
X5M
230 V
X7M
F2B
X2M: 34-35
Only for *KHWSU*V3
Booster heater
5 core
5Gx2.5
X6M
230 V
Q2L - clixon
booster heater
R5T - thermistor
water temperature
Q*L
clixon
signal
2 core
X8M
solar pump
230 V
X4M: 1-2-earth
NO valve: X2M: 6-7
NC valve: X2M: 5-7
X2M: 13-14
X5M: 7-8
X9A (PCB A1P)
X5M: 9-10
230 V
SPST:
X2M: 8-9-10
Only for *KRP1AHTA
Power limitation
demand input 1
Power limitation
demand input 2
Power limitation
demand input 3
Power limitation
demand input 4
2 core
230 V
2 core
230 V
2 core
3
230 V
2 core
230 V
3
main: X2M: 1-2-3-4
add: X2M: 1a-2a-3-4
A8P: X801M: 1-5
A8P: X801M: 2-5
A8P: X801M: 3-5
A8P: X801M: 4-5
BSK: 1-2 solar interlock
Ext. heat source (eg boiler)
signal
Cooling/heating
On/OFF output
230 V
2 core
Circulation pump
for DHW
230 V
2way valve
2 core
M2S (*KHBX units)
for cooling mode
230 V
2 core
Electricity meter
pulse input 1
signal
2 core
Electricity meter
pulse input 2
signal
3
2 core
230 V
external thermistor
(indoor or outdoor)
External room thermostat / Heat pump convector
(main and/or additional zone)
main: X2M: 1-2-4
add: X2M: 1a-2a-4
Field supply
Only for *KSR3PA option
230 V
Only for KRCS01-1 or EKRSCA1
Only for *KSOLHWAV1
M3S (when *KHW is installed)
selection domestic hot water-floor heating
alarm indication
230 V
A4P: X4
X2M: 28
X5M: 5-6
3way valve
Only for *KRP1HB* & *KSOLHWAV1
A4P: Y1
X2M: 28
Alarm output
2way valve
Q*L
clixon
Field supply
Indoor Unit
backup heater power supply (3/6/9 kW): 400 V or 230 V + earth
main: X2M: 1-4
add: X2M: 1a-4
X2M: 32-33
X5M: 1-2
3 core for C/H operation
2 core for H only operation
230 V
5 core for C/H operation
4 core for H only operation
230 V
4 core
230 V
2 core
2x0.75
communication
2 core
2x0.75
communication
A3P: X1M: C-com-H
Only for *KRTR
(wireless room thermostat)
A4P: X1M: H-C-com
X2M: L-N
A3P: X1M: 1-3
94
2 core
(3m included)
Only for *KRTETS
R2T
External sensor
(floor or ambient)
signal
Only for
(heat pump convector)
X11M: 3-4-5-6
Standard part
A2P: P1-P2 user interface
Only for *KRUCBL*
A2P: P1-P2 user interface
Installer reference guide
Optional part
Only for *KRTW
(wired room thermostat)
Optional part
4D090420 A
ERHQ+ERLQ011~016 + EHBH/X11+16CB
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P384974-1B – 2017.04
14 Technical data
14.6
Drain pan necessity
Entering water temperature limit to prevent condensation
Relative humidity 40%
Relative humidity 60%
Entering water temperature [°C]
Entering water temperature [°C]
Relative humidity 80%
Example:
With ambient temperature of 25°C
and relative humidity of 40%.
If entering water temperature is
below 12°C, condensation on water
piping will happen.
Dry bulb temperature [°C]
1. Refer to psychometric chart for more information.
2. If condensation is expected, installation of EKHBDPCA2 - drainpan kit must be considered.
4D078990
ERHQ+ERLQ011~016 + EHBH/X11+16CB
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P384974-1B – 2017.04
Installer reference guide
95
15 Glossary
14.7
ESP curve: Indoor unit
Note: A flow error will occur when the minimum water flow rate is not
reached.
EHBH/X11=EHBH/X11
Operation area is extended to lower flow rates only in case the unit
operates with heat pump only. (Not in startup, no backup heater
operation, no defrost operation).
ESP=External static pressure [kPa] in the space heating/cooling
circuit.
A (kPa)
80
70
60
Flow=Water flow through the unit in the space heating/cooling
circuit.
50
Notes:
40
30
▪ Selecting a flow outside the area of operation can cause damage
or malfunction of the unit. See also the minimum and maximum
allowed water flow range in the technical specifications.
C
20
10
0
▪ Water quality MUST be according to EN directive EC98/83EC.
0
10
20
30
50
40
B (l/min)
15
4D090625-1A
EHBH/X16=EHBH/X16
Dealer
Sales distributor for the product.
A (kPa)
100
Authorized installer
Technical skilled person who is qualified to install the
product.
90
80
70
60
User
50
Person who is owner of the product and/or operates the
product.
C
40
30
20
10
0
Glossary
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
B (l/min)
4D090625-1A
A
B
C
External static pressure
Water flow rate
Operation range
Applicable legislation
All international, European, national and local directives,
laws, regulations and/or codes that are relevant and
applicable for a certain product or domain.
Service company
Qualified company which can perform or coordinate the
required service to the product.
Installation manual
Instruction manual specified for a certain product or
application, explaining how to install, configure and maintain
it.
Operation manual
Instruction manual specified for a certain product or
application, explaining how to operate it.
Maintenance instructions
Instruction manual specified for a certain product or
application, which explains (if relevant) how to install,
configure, operate and/or maintain the product or
application.
Accessories
Labels, manuals, information sheets and equipment that are
delivered with the product and that need to be installed
according to the instructions in the accompanying
documentation.
Optional equipment
Equipment made or approved by Daikin that can be
combined with the product according to the instructions in
the accompanying documentation.
Field supply
Equipment not made by Daikin that can be combined with
the product according to the instructions in the
accompanying documentation.
Installer reference guide
96
ERHQ+ERLQ011~016 + EHBH/X11+16CB
Daikin Altherma – Low temperature split
4P384974-1B – 2017.04
1/9
[6.8.2] = .... ID66F2
Field settings table
Applicable indoor units
*HBH04CB3V
*HBH08CB3V
*HBH11CB3V
*HBH16CB3V
*HBX04CB3V
*HBX08CB3V
*HBX11CB3V
*HBX16CB3V
*HVH04S18CB3V
*HVH08S18CB3V
*HVH11S18CB3V
*HVH16S18CB3V
*HVX04S18CB3V
*HVX08S18CB3V
*HVX11S18CB3V
*HVX16S18CB3V
*HBH08CB9W
*HBH11CB9W
*HBH16CB9W
*HBX08CB9W
*HBX11CB9W
*HBX16CB9W
*HVH08S26CB9W
*HVH11S26CB9W
*HVH16S26CB9W
*HVX08S26CB9W
*HVX11S26CB9W
*HVX16S26CB9W
Notes
(*1)
(*2)
(*3)
(*4)
(*5)
(*6)
*HB*
*HV*
*3V
*9W
*04/08*
*11/16*
4P383508-1B - 2017.04
2/9
Field settings table
Breadcrumb
Field code
Setting name
User settings
└─ Preset values
└─ Room temperature
7.4.1.1
Comfort (heating)
Range, step
Default value
R/W
7.4.1.2
Eco (heating)
R/W
7.4.1.3
Comfort (cooling)
R/W
7.4.1.4
Eco (cooling)
R/W
7.4.2.1
[8-09]
└─ LWT main
Comfort (heating)
R/W
7.4.2.2
[8-0A]
Eco (heating)
R/W
7.4.2.3
[8-07]
Comfort (cooling)
R/W
7.4.2.4
[8-08]
Eco (cooling)
R/W
7.4.2.5
Comfort (heating)
R/W
7.4.2.6
Eco (heating)
R/W
7.4.2.7
Comfort (cooling)
R/W
7.4.2.8
Eco (cooling)
R/W
7.4.3.1
[6-0A]
└─ Tank temperature
Storage comfort
R/W
7.4.3.2
[6-0B]
Storage eco
R/W
7.4.3.3
[6-0C]
Reheat
R/W
Installer setting at variance with
default value
Date
Value
[3-07]~[3-06], step: A.3.2.4
21°C
[3-07]~[3-06], step: A.3.2.4
19°C
[3-08]~[3-09], step: A.3.2.4
24°C
[3-08]~[3-09], step: A.3.2.4
26°C
[9-01]~[9-00], step: 1°C
35°C
[9-01]~[9-00], step: 1°C
33°C
[9-03]~[9-02], step: 1°C
18°C
[9-03]~[9-02], step: 1°C
20°C
-10~10°C, step: 1°C
0°C
-10~10°C, step: 1°C
-2°C
-10~10°C, step: 1°C
0°C
-10~10°C, step: 1°C
2°C
30~[6-0E]°C, step: 1°C
60°C
30~min(50, [6-0E])°C, step: 1°C
45°C
30~min(50, [6-0E])°C, step: 1°C
45°C
└─ Quiet level
7.4.4
7.4.5.1
7.4.5.2
7.4.5.3
[C-0C]
[D-0C]
[C-0D]
[D-0D]
[C-0E]
[D-0E]
└─ Electricity price
High
R/W
0: Level 1 (*6)
1: Level 2 (*5)
2: Level 3
R/W
0,00~990/kWh
0/kWh
0,00~990/kWh
0/kWh
0,00~990/kWh
0/kWh
Medium
R/W
Low
R/W
└─ Fuel price
7.4.6
└─ Set weather dependent
└─ Main
└────────────────── Set weather-dependent heating
7.7.1.1
[1-00]
Set weather-dependent heating Low ambient temp. for LWT main zone heating
WD curve.
7.7.1.1
[1-01]
Set weather-dependent heating High ambient temp. for LWT main zone heating
WD curve.
7.7.1.1
[1-02]
Set weather-dependent heating Leaving water value for low ambient temp. for
LWT main zone heating WD curve.
7.7.1.1
[1-03]
Set weather-dependent heating Leaving water value for high ambient temp. for
LWT main zone heating WD curve.
└────────────────── Set weather-dependent cooling
7.7.1.2
[1-06]
Set weather-dependent cooling Low ambient temp. for LWT main zone cooling
WD curve.
7.7.1.2
[1-07]
Set weather-dependent cooling High ambient temp. for LWT main zone cooling
WD curve.
7.7.1.2
[1-08]
Set weather-dependent cooling Leaving water value for low ambient temp. for
LWT main zone cooling WD curve.
7.7.1.2
[1-09]
Set weather-dependent cooling Leaving water value for high ambient temp. for
LWT main zone cooling WD curve.
└─ Additional
└────────────────── Set weather-dependent heating
7.7.2.1
[0-00]
Set weather-dependent heating Leaving water value for high ambient temp. for
LWT add zone heating WD curve.
7.7.2.1
[0-01]
Set weather-dependent heating Leaving water value for low ambient temp. for
LWT add zone heating WD curve.
7.7.2.1
[0-02]
Set weather-dependent heating High ambient temp. for LWT add zone heating
WD curve.
7.7.2.1
[0-03]
Set weather-dependent heating Low ambient temp. for LWT add zone heating
WD curve.
└────────────────── Set weather-dependent cooling
7.7.2.2
[0-04]
Set weather-dependent cooling Leaving water value for high ambient temp. for
LWT add zone cooling WD curve.
7.7.2.2
[0-05]
Set weather-dependent cooling Leaving water value for low ambient temp. for
LWT add zone cooling WD curve.
7.7.2.2
[0-06]
Set weather-dependent cooling High ambient temp. for LWT add zone cooling
WD curve.
7.7.2.2
[0-07]
Set weather-dependent cooling Low ambient temp. for LWT add zone cooling
WD curve.
Installer settings
└─ System layout
└─ Standard
Unit type
A.2.1.1
[E-00]
R/W
0,00~990/kWh
0,00~290/MBtu
8,0/kWh
R/W
-40~5°C, step: 1°C
-10°C
10~25°C, step: 1°C
15°C
[9-01]~[9-00]°C, step: 1°C
35°C
[9-01]~min(45, [9-00])°C , step: 1°C
25°C
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/W
R/O
A.2.1.2
[E-01]
Compressor type
R/O
A.2.1.3
[E-02]
Indoor software type
R/O
A.2.1.4
[E-03]
Backup heater steps
R/O
4P383508-1B - 2017.04
10~25°C, step: 1°C
20°C
25~43°C, step: 1°C
35°C
[9-03]~[9-02]°C, step: 1°C
22°C
[9-03]~[9-02]°C, step: 1°C
18°C
[9-05]~min(45,[9-06])°C, step: 1°C
35°C
[9-05]~[9-06]°C, step: 1°C
45°C
10~25°C, step: 1°C
15°C
-40~5°C, step: 1°C
-10°C
[9-07]~[9-08]°C, step: 1°C
8°C
[9-07]~[9-08]°C, step: 1°C
12°C
25~43°C, step: 1°C
35°C
10~25°C, step: 1°C
20°C
0~5
0: LT split
0: 8
1: 16
0: Type 1
1: Type 2
0: No BUH
1: 1 step
2: 2 steps
(*1) *HB*_(*2) *HV*_
(*3) *3V_(*4) *9W_
(*5) *04/08*_
(*6) *11/16*
3/9
Field settings table
Breadcrumb
Field code
Setting name
A.2.1.5
[5-0D]
BUH type
R/W
A.2.1.6
[D-01]
Forced off contact
R/W
A.2.1.7
[C-07]
Unit control method
R/W
A.2.1.8
[7-02]
Number of LWT zones
R/W
A.2.1.9
[F-0D]
Pump operation mode
R/W
A.2.1.A
[E-04]
Power saving possible
R/O
User interface location
R/W
A.2.1.B
Range, step
Default value
A.2.2.1
[E-05]
└─ Options
DHW operation
A.2.2.3
[E-07]
DHW tank type
R/W
A.2.2.4
[C-05]
Contact type main
R/W
A.2.2.5
[C-06]
Contact type add.
R/W
A.2.2.6.1
[C-02]
Digital I/O PCB
Ext. backup heat src
R/W
A.2.2.6.2
[D-07]
Digital I/O PCB
Solar kit
R/W
R/W
A.2.2.6.3
[C-09]
Digital I/O PCB
Alarm output
R/W
A.2.2.6.4
[F-04]
Digital I/O PCB
Bottom plate heater
R/W
A.2.2.7
[D-04]
Demand PCB
R/W
A.2.2.8
[D-08]
External kWh meter 1
R/W
A.2.2.9
[D-09]
External kWh meter 2
R/W
A.2.2.A
[D-02]
DHW pump
R/W
A.2.2.B
[C-08]
External sensor
R/W
A.2.3.1
[6-02]
A.2.3.2
[6-03]
BUH: step 1
R/W
A.2.3.3
[6-04]
BUH: step 2
R/W
A.2.3.6
[6-07]
Bottom plate heater
R/W
└─ Capacities
Booster heater
R/W
└─ Space operation
└─ LWT settings
└────────────────── Main
LWT setpoint mode
A.3.1.1.1
R/W
A.3.1.1.2.1
[9-01]
Temperature range
Minimum temp (heating)
R/W
A.3.1.1.2.2
[9-00]
Temperature range
Maximum temp (heating)
R/W
A.3.1.1.2.3
[9-03]
Temperature range
Minimum temp (cooling)
R/W
A.3.1.1.2.4
[9-02]
Temperature range
Maximum temp (cooling)
R/W
A.3.1.1.5
[8-05]
Modulated LWT
A.3.1.1.6.1
[F-0B]
Shut-off valve
Thermo On/OFF
R/W
A.3.1.1.6.2
[F-0C]
Shut-off valve
Cooling
R/W
A.3.1.1.7
[9-0B]
Emitter type
R/W
└────────────────── Additional
LWT setpoint mode
R/W
A.3.1.2.1
(*1) *HB*_(*2) *HV*_
(*3) *3V_(*4) *9W_
(*5) *04/08*_
(*6) *11/16*
R/W
Installer setting at variance with
default value
Date
Value
0: 1P,(1/2)
1: 1P,(1/1+2) (*3)
2: 3P,(1/2)
3: 3P,(1/1+2)
4: 3PN,(1/2)
5: 3PN,(1/1+2) (*4)
0: No
1: Open tariff
2: Closed tariff
3: Thermostat
0: LWT control
1: Ext RT control
2: RT control
0: 1 LWT zone
1: 2 LWT zones
0: Continuous
1: Sample
2: Request
0: No
1: Yes
0: At unit
1: In room
0: No (*1)
1: Yes (*2)
0~6
0: Type 1 (*1)
1: Type 2 (*2)
1: Thermo ON/OFF
2: C/H request
1: Thermo ON/OFF
2: C/H request
0: No
1: Bivalent
2: 3: 0: No
1: Yes
0: Normally open
1: Normally closed
0: No
1: Yes
0: No
1: Pwr consmp ctrl
0: No
1: 0,1 pulse/kWh
2: 1 pulse/kWh
3: 10 pulse/kWh
4: 100 pulse/kWh
5: 1000 pulse/kWh
0: No
1: 0,1 pulse/kWh
2: 1 pulse/kWh
3: 10 pulse/kWh
4: 100 pulse/kWh
5: 1000 pulse/kWh
0~4
0: No
1: Secondary rtrn
2: Disinf. shunt
0: No
1: Outdoor sensor
2: Room sensor
0~10kW, step: 0,2kW
3kW (*1)
0kW (*2)
0~10kW, step: 0,2kW
3kW
0~10kW, step: 0,2kW
0kW (*3)
6kW (*4)
0~200W, step: 10W
0W
0: Fixed
1: Weather dep.
2: Fixed + scheduled
3: WD + scheduled
15~37°C, step: 1°C
25°C
37~depending on outdoor unit, step: 1°C
55°C
5~18°C, step: 1°C
5°C
18~22°C, step: 1°C
22°C
0: No
1: Yes
0: No
1: Yes
0: No
1: Yes
0: Quick
1: Slow
0: Fixed
1: Weather dep.
2: Fixed + scheduled
3: WD + scheduled
4P383508-1B - 2017.04
4/9
Field settings table
Breadcrumb
Field code
Setting name
Range, step
Default value
A.3.1.2.2.1
[9-05]
Temperature range
Minimum temp (heating)
R/W
A.3.1.2.2.2
[9-06]
Temperature range
Maximum temp (heating)
R/W
A.3.1.2.2.3
[9-07]
Temperature range
Minimum temp (cooling)
R/W
A.3.1.2.2.4
[9-08]
Temperature range
Maximum temp (cooling)
R/W
A.3.1.3.1
[9-09]
└────────────────── Delta T source
Heating
R/W
A.3.1.3.2
[9-0A]
Cooling
R/W
A.3.2.1.1
[3-07]
└─ Room thermostat
Room temp. range
Minimum temp (heating)
R/W
A.3.2.1.2
[3-06]
Room temp. range
Maximum temp (heating)
R/W
A.3.2.1.3
[3-09]
Room temp. range
Minimum temp (cooling)
R/W
A.3.2.1.4
[3-08]
Room temp. range
Maximum temp (cooling)
R/W
A.3.2.2
[2-0A]
Room temp. offset
R/W
A.3.2.3
[2-09]
Ext. room sensor offset
R/W
Room temp. step
R/W
A.3.2.4
A.3.3.1
A.3.3.2
A.4.1
[4-02]
[F-01]
└─ Operation range
Space heating OFF temp
R/W
R/W
Space cooling On temp
└─ Domestic hot water (DHW)
└─ Type
[6-0D]
└─ Disinfection
Disinfection
Operation day
R/W
A.4.4.3
[2-02]
Start time
R/W
A.4.4.4
[2-03]
Temperature target
R/W
A.4.4.5
[2-04]
Duration
R/W
A.4.5
[6-0E]
└─ Maximum setpoint
[0-0B]
[0-0C]
Weather-dependent curve
A.4.7
[0-0D]
A.4.7
[0-0E]
[E-07]≠1 : 40~80°C, step: 1°C
60°C
[E-07]=1 : 40~60°C, step: 1°C
60°C
R/W
0: Fixed
1: Weather dep.
R/W
35~[6-0E]°C, step: 1°C
55°C
45~[6-0E]°C, step: 1°C
60°C
10~25°C, step: 1°C
15°C
-40~5°C, step: 1°C
-10°C
A.5.1.1
Weather-dependent curve
Leaving water value for high ambient temp. for
DHW WD curve.
Leaving water value for low ambient temp. for
DHW WD curve.
High ambient temp. for DHW WD curve.
R/W
Weather-dependent curve
Low ambient temp. for DHW WD curve.
R/W
└─ Heat sources
└─ Backup heater
Operation mode
[4-00]
R/W
R/W
A.5.1.3
[4-07]
Enable BUH step 2
R/W
A.5.1.4
[5-01]
Equilibrium temp.
R/W
A.6.1
└─ System operation
└─ Auto restart
[3-00]
0~2
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
0: No
1: Yes
-15~35°C, step: 1°C
0°C
R/W
0: No
1: Yes
└─ Preferential kWh rate
Allowed heaters
R/W
0: None
1: BSH only
2: BUH only
3: All heaters
0: Forced off
1: As normal
A.6.2.1
[D-00]
A.6.2.2
[D-05]
Forced pump OFF
R/W
[4-08]
└─ Pwr consumpt. Control
Mode
R/W
A.6.3.1
14~35°C, step: 1°C
25°C (*5)
14~35°C, step: 1°C
35°C (*6)
10~35°C, step: 1°C
20°C
R/W
└─ SP mode
A.4.7
12~18°C, step: A.3.2.4
12°C
18~30°C, step: A.3.2.4
30°C
15~25°C, step: A.3.2.4
15°C
25~35°C, step: A.3.2.4
35°C
-5~5°C, step: 0,5°C
0°C
-5~5°C, step: 0,5°C
0°C
0: 0,5 °C
1: 1 °C
0: No
1: Yes
0: Each day
1: Monday
2: Tuesday
3: Wednesday
4: Thursday
5: Friday
6: Saturday
7: Sunday
0~23 hour, step: 1 hour
23
[E-07]≠1 : 55~80°C, step: 5°C
70°C
[E-07]=1 : 60°C
60°C
[E-07]≠1 : 5~60 min, step: 5 min
10 min
[E-07]=1 : 40~60 min, step: 5 min
40 min
[2-00]
A.4.7
3~10°C, step: 1°C
5°C
3~10°C, step: 1°C
5°C
R/W
A.4.4.2
└─ Weather dependent curve
Weather-dependent curve
5~18°C, step: 1°C
5°C
18~22°C, step: 1°C
22°C
0: Reheat only
1: Reheat + sched.
2: Scheduled only
[2-01]
A.4.6
15~37°C, step: 1°C
25°C
37~depending on outdoor unit, step: 1°C
55°C
R/W
A.4.4.1
4P383508-1B - 2017.04
Installer setting at variance with
default value
Date
Value
0: No limitation
1: Continuous
2: Digital inputs
(*1) *HB*_(*2) *HV*_
(*3) *3V_(*4) *9W_
(*5) *04/08*_
(*6) *11/16*
5/9
Field settings table
Breadcrumb
Field code
Setting name
Range, step
Default value
A.6.3.2
[4-09]
Type
R/W
A.6.3.3
[5-05]
Amp. value
R/W
A.6.3.4
[5-09]
kW value
A.6.3.5.1
[5-05]
Amp. limits for DI
Limit DI1
R/W
R/W
A.6.3.5.2
[5-06]
Amp. limits for DI
Limit DI2
R/W
A.6.3.5.3
[5-07]
Amp. limits for DI
Limit DI3
R/W
A.6.3.5.4
[5-08]
Amp. limits for DI
Limit DI4
R/W
A.6.3.6.1
[5-09]
kW limits for DI
Limit DI1
R/W
A.6.3.6.2
[5-0A]
kW limits for DI
Limit DI2
R/W
A.6.3.6.3
[5-0B]
kW limits for DI
Limit DI3
R/W
A.6.3.6.4
[5-0C]
kW limits for DI
Limit DI4
R/W
A.6.3.7
[4-01]
Priority
A.6.4
[1-0A]
A.6.5
[2-0B]
R/W
Installer setting at variance with
default value
Date
Value
0: Current
1: Power
0~50 A, step: 1 A
50 A
0~20 kW, step: 0,5 kW
20 kW
0~50 A, step: 1 A
50 A
0~50 A, step: 1 A
50 A
0~50 A, step: 1 A
50 A
0~50 A, step: 1 A
50 A
0~20 kW, step: 0,5 kW
20 kW
0~20 kW, step: 0,5 kW
20 kW
0~20 kW, step: 0,5 kW
20 kW
0~20 kW, step: 0,5 kW
20 kW
0: None
1: BSH
2: BUH
└─ Averaging time
R/W
0: No averaging
1: 12 hours
2: 24 hours
3: 48 hours
4: 72 hours
R/W
-5~5°C, step: 0,5°C
0°C
R/W
0: Very high
1: High
2: Medium
3: Low
4: Very low
R/W
0: Manual
1: Automatic
R/W
[9-05]~min(45,[9-06])°C, step: 1°C
35°C
[9-05]~[9-06]°C, step: 1°C
45°C
10~25°C, step: 1°C
15°C
-40~5°C, step: 1°C
-10°C
[9-07]~[9-08]°C, step: 1°C
8°C
[9-07]~[9-08]°C, step: 1°C
12°C
25~43°C, step: 1°C
35°C
10~25°C, step: 1°C
20°C
35~[6-0E]°C, step: 1°C
55°C
45~[6-0E]°C, step: 1°C
60°C
10~25°C, step: 1°C
15°C
-40~5°C, step: 1°C
-10°C
-40~5°C, step: 1°C
-10°C
10~25°C, step: 1°C
15°C
[9-01]~[9-00], step: 1°C
35°C
[9-01]~min(45, [9-00])°C , step: 1°C
25°C
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
10~25°C, step: 1°C
20°C
25~43°C, step: 1°C
35°C
[9-03]~[9-02]°C, step: 1°C
22°C
[9-03]~[9-02]°C, step: 1°C
18°C
0: No averaging
1: 12 hours
2: 24 hours
3: 48 hours
4: 72 hours
0: Each day
1: Monday
2: Tuesday
3: Wednesday
4: Thursday
5: Friday
6: Saturday
7: Sunday
0: No
1: Yes
└─ Ext amb. sensor offset
└─ Boiler efficiency
A.6.A
[7-05]
└─ Emergency
A.6.C
A.8
└─ Overview settings
[0-00]
Leaving water value for high ambient temp. for LWT add zone heating WD curve.
A.8
[0-01]
Leaving water value for low ambient temp. for LWT add zone heating WD curve.
R/W
A.8
[0-02]
High ambient temp. for LWT add zone heating WD curve.
R/W
A.8
[0-03]
Low ambient temp. for LWT add zone heating WD curve.
R/W
A.8
[0-04]
Leaving water value for high ambient temp. for LWT add zone cooling WD curve.
R/W
A.8
[0-05]
Leaving water value for low ambient temp. for LWT add zone cooling WD curve.
R/W
A.8
[0-06]
High ambient temp. for LWT add zone cooling WD curve.
R/W
A.8
[0-07]
Low ambient temp. for LWT add zone cooling WD curve.
R/W
A.8
[0-0B]
Leaving water value for high ambient temp. for DHW WD curve.
R/W
A.8
[0-0C]
Leaving water value for low ambient temp. for DHW WD curve.
R/W
A.8
[0-0D]
High ambient temp. for DHW WD curve.
R/W
A.8
[0-0E]
Low ambient temp. for DHW WD curve.
R/W
A.8
[1-00]
Low ambient temp. for LWT main zone heating WD curve.
R/W
A.8
[1-01]
High ambient temp. for LWT main zone heating WD curve.
R/W
A.8
[1-02]
Leaving water value for low ambient temp. for LWT main zone heating WD curve.
R/W
A.8
[1-03]
Leaving water value for high ambient temp. for LWT main zone heating WD curve.
R/W
A.8
[1-04]
Weather dependent cooling of the main leaving water temperature zone.
R/W
A.8
[1-05]
Weather dependent cooling of the additional leaving water temperature zone
R/W
A.8
[1-06]
Low ambient temp. for LWT main zone cooling WD curve.
R/W
A.8
[1-07]
High ambient temp. for LWT main zone cooling WD curve.
R/W
A.8
[1-08]
Leaving water value for low ambient temp. for LWT main zone cooling WD curve.
R/W
A.8
[1-09]
Leaving water value for high ambient temp. for LWT main zone cooling WD curve.
R/W
A.8
[1-0A]
What is the averaging time for the outdoor temp?
R/W
A.8
[2-00]
When should the disinfection function be executed?
R/W
A.8
[2-01]
Should the disinfection function be executed?
R/W
(*1) *HB*_(*2) *HV*_
(*3) *3V_(*4) *9W_
(*5) *04/08*_
(*6) *11/16*
4P383508-1B - 2017.04
6/9
Field settings table
Breadcrumb
Field code
Setting name
Range, step
Default value
A.8
[2-02]
When should the disinfection function start?
R/W
A.8
[2-03]
What is the disinfection target temperature?
R/W
A.8
[2-04]
How long must the tank temperature be maintained?
R/W
A.8
[2-05]
Room antifrost temperature
R/W
A.8
[2-06]
Room frost protection
R/W
A.8
[2-09]
Adjust the offset on the measured room temperature
R/W
A.8
[2-0A]
Adjust the offset on the measured room temperature
R/W
A.8
[2-0B]
What is the required offset on the measured outdoor temp.?
R/W
A.8
[3-00]
Is auto restart of the unit allowed?
R/W
A.8
A.8
A.8
A.8
A.8
A.8
[3-01]
[3-02]
[3-03]
[3-04]
[3-05]
[3-06]
-----What is the maximum desired room temperature in heating?
R/W
A.8
[3-07]
What is the mimimum desired room temperature in heating?
R/W
A.8
[3-08]
What is the maximum desired room temperature in cooling?
R/W
A.8
[3-09]
What is the minimum desired room temperature in cooling?
R/W
A.8
[4-00]
What is the BUH operation mode?
R/W
A.8
[4-01]
Which electric heater has priority?
R/W
A.8
[4-02]
Below which outdoor temperature is heating allowed?
R/W
A.8
[4-03]
Operation permission of the booster heater.
R/W
A.8
A.8
A.8
A.8
[4-04]
[4-05]
[4-06]
[4-07]
---- (Do not change this value)
Enable the second step of the backup heater?
R/W
A.8
[4-08]
Which power limitation mode is required on the system?
R/W
A.8
[4-09]
Which power limitation type is required?
R/W
A.8
A.8
[4-0A]
[4-0B]
-Automatic cooling/heating changeover hysteresis.
R/W
A.8
[4-0D]
Automatic cooling/heating changeover offset.
R/W
A.8
[5-00]
R/W
A.8
[5-01]
Is backup heater operation allowed above equilibrium temperature during space
heating operation?
What is the equilibrium temperature for the building?
A.8
[5-02]
Space heating priority.
R/W
A.8
[5-03]
Space heating priority temperature.
R/W
A.8
[5-04]
Set point correction for domestic hot water temperature.
R/W
R/W
A.8
[5-05]
What is the requested limit for DI1?
R/W
A.8
[5-06]
What is the requested limit for DI2?
R/W
A.8
[5-07]
What is the requested limit for DI3?
R/W
A.8
[5-08]
What is the requested limit for DI4?
R/W
A.8
[5-09]
What is the requested limit for DI1?
R/W
A.8
[5-0A]
What is the requested limit for DI2?
R/W
A.8
[5-0B]
What is the requested limit for DI3?
R/W
A.8
[5-0C]
What is the requested limit for DI4?
R/W
A.8
[5-0D]
What type of backup heater installation is used?
R/W
A.8
A.8
[5-0E]
[6-00]
-The temperature difference determining the heat pump ON temperature.
R/W
A.8
[6-01]
The temperature difference determining the heat pump OFF temperature.
R/W
4P383508-1B - 2017.04
Installer setting at variance with
default value
Date
Value
0~23 hour, step: 1 hour
23
[E-07]≠1 : 55~80°C, step: 5°C
70°C
[E-07]=1 : 60°C
60°C
[E-07]≠1: 5~60 min, step: 5 min
10 min
[E-07]=1: 40~60 min, step: 5 min
40 min
4~16°C, step: 1°C
12°C
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
-5~5°C, step: 0,5°C
0°C
-5~5°C, step: 0,5°C
0°C
-5~5°C, step: 0,5°C
0°C
0: No
1: Yes
0
1
4
2
1
18~30°C, step: A.3.2.4
30°C
12~18°C, step: A.3.2.4
12°C
25~35°C, step: A.3.2.4
35°C
15~25°C, step: A.3.2.4
15°C
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
2: Only DHW
0: None
1: BSH
2: BUH
14~35°C, step: 1°C
25°C (*5)
14~35°C, step: 1°C
35°C (*6)
0: Limited
1: No limit
2: Most optimum
3: Optimum
4: Only legionella
2
0
0/1
0: No
1: Yes
0: No limitation
1: Continuous
2: Digital inputs
0: Current
1: Power
0
1~10°C, step: 0,5°C
1°C
1~10°C, step: 0,5°C
3°C
0: Allowed
1: Not allowed
-15~35°C, step: 1°C
0°C
0: Disabled [E-07]≠1
1: Enabled [E-07]=1
-15~35°C, step: 1°C
0°C
0~20°C, step: 1°C
10°C
0~50 A, step: 1 A
50 A
0~50 A, step: 1 A
50 A
0~50 A, step: 1 A
50 A
0~50 A, step: 1 A
50 A
0~20 kW, step: 0,5 kW
20 kW
0~20 kW, step: 0,5 kW
20 kW
0~20 kW, step: 0,5 kW
20 kW
0~20 kW, step: 0,5 kW
20 kW
0: 1P,(1/2)
1: 1P,(1/1+2) (*3)
2: 3P,(1/2)
3: 3P,(1/1+2)
4: 3PN,(1/2)
5: 3PN,(1/1+2) (*4)
1
2~20°C, step: 1°C
2°C
0~10°C, step: 1°C
2°C
(*1) *HB*_(*2) *HV*_
(*3) *3V_(*4) *9W_
(*5) *04/08*_
(*6) *11/16*
7/9
Field settings table
Breadcrumb
Field code
Setting name
A.8
[6-02]
What is the capacity of the booster heater?
R/W
A.8
[6-03]
What is the capacity of the backup heater step 1?
R/W
A.8
[6-04]
What is the capacity of the backup heater step 2?
R/W
A.8
A.8
A.8
[6-05]
[6-06]
[6-07]
--What is the capacity of the bottom plate heater?
R/W
A.8
[6-08]
What is the hysteresis to be used in reheat mode?
R/W
A.8
A.8
[6-09]
[6-0A]
-What is the desired comfort storage temperature?
R/W
A.8
[6-0B]
What is the desired eco storage temperature?
R/W
A.8
[6-0C]
What is the desired reheat temperature?
R/W
A.8
[6-0D]
What is the desired DHW production type?
R/W
A.8
[6-0E]
What is the maximum temperature setpoint?
R/W
A.8
[7-00]
Domestic hot water booster heater overshoot temperature.
R/W
A.8
[7-01]
Domestic hot water booster heater hysteresis.
R/W
A.8
[7-02]
How many leaving water temperature zones are there?
R/W
A.8
A.8
A.8
[7-03]
[7-04]
[7-05]
--Boiler efficiency
R/W
A.8
A.8
[8-00]
[8-01]
-Maximum running time for domestic hot water operation.
R/W
A.8
[8-02]
Anti-recycling time.
R/W
A.8
[8-03]
Booster heater delay timer.
R/W
A.8
[8-04]
Additional running time for the maximum running time.
R/W
A.8
[8-05]
Allow modulation of the LWT to control the room temp?
R/W
A.8
[8-06]
Leaving water temperature maximum modulation.
R/W
A.8
[8-07]
What is the desired comfort main LWT in cooling?
R/W
A.8
[8-08]
What is the desired eco main LWT in cooling?
R/W
A.8
[8-09]
What is the desired comfort main LWT in heating?
R/W
A.8
[8-0A]
What is the desired eco main LWT in heating?
R/W
A.8
A.8
A.8
A.8
[8-0B]
[8-0C]
[8-0D]
[9-00]
---What is the maximum desired LWT for main zone in heating?
R/W
A.8
[9-01]
What is the mimimum desired LWT for main zone in heating?
R/W
A.8
[9-02]
What is the maximum desired LWT for main zone in cooling?
R/W
A.8
[9-03]
What is the mimimum desired LWT for main zone in cooling?
R/W
A.8
[9-04]
Leaving water temperature overshoot temperature.
R/W
A.8
[9-05]
What is the mimimum desired LWT for add. zone in heating?
R/W
A.8
[9-06]
What is the maximum desired LWT for add. zone in heating?
R/W
A.8
[9-07]
What is the mimimum desired LWT for add. zone in cooling?
R/W
A.8
[9-08]
What is the maximum desired LWT for add. zone in cooling?
R/W
A.8
[9-09]
What is the desired delta T in heating?
R/W
A.8
[9-0A]
What is the desired delta T in cooling?
R/W
A.8
[9-0B]
What emitter type is connected to the main LWT zone?
R/W
A.8
[9-0C]
Room temperature hysteresis.
R/W
A.8
[9-0D]
Pump speed limitation
R/W
A.8
A.8
A.8
[9-0E]
[A-00]
[A-01]
----
(*1) *HB*_(*2) *HV*_
(*3) *3V_(*4) *9W_
(*5) *04/08*_
(*6) *11/16*
Range, step
Default value
Installer setting at variance with
default value
Date
Value
0~10kW, step: 0,2kW
3kW (*1)
0kW (*2)
0~10kW, step: 0,2kW
3kW
0~10kW, step: 0,2kW
0kW (*3)
6kW (*4)
0
0
0~200W, step: 10W
0W
2~20°C, step: 1°C
10°C
0
30~[6-0E]°C, step: 1°C
60°C
30~min(50, [6-0E])°C, step: 1°C
45°C
30~min(50, [6-0E])°C, step: 1°C
45°C
0: Reheat only
1: Reheat + sched.
2: Scheduled only
[E-07]≠1 : 40~80°C, step: 1°C
60°C
[E-07]=1 : 40~60°C, step: 1°C
60°C
0~4°C, step: 1°C
0°C
2~40°C, step: 1°C
2°C
0: 1 LWT zone
1: 2 LWT zones
2,5
0
0: Very high
1: High
2: Medium
3: Low
4: Very low
1 min
5~95 min, step: 5 min
30 min
0~10 hour, step: 0,5 hour
0,5 hour [E-07]=1
3 hour [E-07]≠1
20~95 min, step: 5 min
50 min
0~95 min, step: 5 min
95 min
0: No
1: Yes
0~10°C, step: 1°C
3°C
[9-03]~[9-02], step: 1°C
18°C
[9-03]~[9-02], step: 1°C
20°C
[9-01]~[9-00], step: 1°C
35°C
[9-01]~[9-00], step: 1°C
33°C
13
10
16
37~depending on outdoor unit, step: 1°C
55°C
15~37°C, step: 1°C
25°C
18~22°C, step: 1°C
22°C
5~18°C, step: 1°C
5°C
1~4°C, step: 1°C
1°C
15~37°C, step: 1°C
25°C
37~depending on outdoor unit, step: 1°C
55°C
5~18°C, step: 1°C
5°C
18~22°C, step: 1°C
22°C
3~10°C, step: 1°C
5°C
3~10°C, step: 1°C
5°C
0: Quick
1: Slow
1~6°C, step: 0,5°C
1 °C
0~8, step:1
0 : 100%
1~4 : 80~50%
5~8 : 80~50%
6
6
0
0 (*5)
3 (*6)
4P383508-1B - 2017.04
8/9
Installer setting at variance with
default value
Date
Value
Field settings table
Breadcrumb
Field code
Setting name
Range, step
Default value
A.8
[A-02]
--
A.8
A.8
A.8
A.8
A.8
A.8
A.8
A.8
[A-03]
[A-04]
[B-00]
[B-01]
[B-02]
[B-03]
[B-04]
[C-00]
-------Domestic heating water priority.
R/W
A.8
A.8
[C-01]
[C-02]
-Is an external backup heat source connected?
R/W
A.8
[C-03]
Bivalent activation temperature.
R/W
A.8
[C-04]
Bivalent hysteresis temperature.
R/W
A.8
[C-05]
What is the thermo request contact type for the main zone?
R/W
A.8
[C-06]
What is the thermo request contact type for the add. zone?
R/W
A.8
[C-07]
What is the unit control method in space operation?
R/W
A.8
[C-08]
Which type of external sensor is installed?
R/W
0 (*5)
1 (*6)
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0: Solar priority
1: Heat pump priority
0
0: No
1: Bivalent
2: 3: -25~25°C, step: 1°C
0°C
2~10°C, step: 1°C
3°C
1: Thermo ON/OFF
2: C/H request
0: 1: Thermo ON/OFF
2: C/H request
0: LWT control
1: Ext RT control
2: RT control
0: No
1: Outdoor sensor
2: Room sensor
0: Normally open
1: Normally closed
0
0~7
0
0~7
0
0~7
0
0: None
1: BSH only
2: BUH only
3: All heaters
0: No
1: Open tariff
2: Closed tariff
3: Thermostat
0~4
0: No
1: Secondary rtrn
2: Disinf. shunt
0: Disabled
1: Enabled, shift 2°C (from -2 to
2: Enabled, shift 4°C (from -2 to
3: Enabled, shift 2°C (from -4 to
4: Enabled, shift 4°C (from -4 to
0: No
1: Pwr consmp ctrl
0: Forced off
1: As normal
0: No
1: Yes
0: No
1: 0,1 pulse/kWh
2: 1 pulse/kWh
3: 10 pulse/kWh
4: 100 pulse/kWh
5: 1000 pulse/kWh
0: No
1: 0,1 pulse/kWh
2: 1 pulse/kWh
3: 10 pulse/kWh
4: 100 pulse/kWh
5: 1000 pulse/kWh
0
2
0~49
0
0~49
0
0~49
0
0~5
0: LT split
0: 8
1: 16
0: Type 1
1: Type 2
0: No BUH
1: 1 step
2: 2 steps
0: No
1: Yes
0: No (*1)
1: Yes (*2)
0: No
1: Yes
0~6
0: Type 1 (*1)
1: Type 2 (*2)
0: Disabled (*6)
1: Enabled (*5)
A.8
[C-09]
What is the required alarm output contact type?
R/W
A.8
A.8
[C-0A]
[C-0C]
-High electricity price decimal (Do not use)
R/W
A.8
[C-0D]
Medium electricity price decimal (Do not use)
R/W
A.8
[C-0E]
Low electricity price decimal (Do not use)
R/W
A.8
[D-00]
Which heaters are permitted if prefer. kWh rate PS is cut?
R/W
A.8
[D-01]
Forced off contact type
R/W
A.8
[D-02]
Which type of DHW pump is installed?
R/W
A.8
[D-03]
Leaving water temperature compensation around 0°C.
R/W
A.8
[D-04]
Is a demand PCB connected?
R/W
A.8
[D-05]
Is the pump allowed to run if prefer. kWh rate PS is cut?
R/W
A.8
[D-07]
Is a solar kit connected?
R/W
A.8
[D-08]
Is an external kWh meter used for power measurement?
R/W
A.8
[D-09]
Is an external kWh meter used for power measurement?
R/W
A.8
A.8
A.8
[D-0A]
[D-0B]
[D-0C]
--What is the high electricity price (Do not use)
R/W
A.8
[D-0D]
What is the medium electricity price (Do not use)
R/W
A.8
[D-0E]
What is the low electricity price (Do not use)
R/W
A.8
[E-00]
Which type of unit is installed?
R/O
A.8
[E-01]
Which type of compressor is installed?
R/O
A.8
[E-02]
What is the indoor unit software type?
R/O
A.8
[E-03]
What is the number of backup heater steps?
R/O
A.8
[E-04]
Is the power saving function available on the outdoor unit?
R/O
A.8
[E-05]
Can the system prepare domestic hot water?
R/W
A.8
[E-06]
Is a DHW tank installed in the system?
R/O
A.8
[E-07]
What kind of DHW tank is installed?
R/W
A.8
[E-08]
Power saving function for outdoor unit.
R/W
4P383508-1B - 2017.04
2°C)
2°C)
4°C)
4°C)
(*1) *HB*_(*2) *HV*_
(*3) *3V_(*4) *9W_
(*5) *04/08*_
(*6) *11/16*
9/9
Field settings table
Breadcrumb
Field code
Setting name
Range, step
Default value
A.8
A.8
A.8
A.8
A.8
A.8
[E-09]
[E-0A]
[E-0B]
[E-0C]
[E-0D]
[F-00]
-----Pump operation allowed outside range.
R/W
A.8
[F-01]
Above which outdoor temperature is cooling allowed?
R/W
A.8
[F-02]
Bottom plate heater ON temperature.
R/W
A.8
[F-03]
Bottom plate heater hysteresis.
R/W
A.8
[F-04]
Is a bottom plate heater connected?
R/W
A.8
A.8
A.8
[F-05]
[F-06]
[F-09]
--Pump operation during flow abnormality.
R/W
A.8
A.8
[F-0A]
[F-0B]
-Close shut-off valve during thermo OFF?
R/W
A.8
[F-0C]
Close shut-off valve during cooling?
R/W
A.8
[F-0D]
What is the pump operation mode?
R/W
0
0
0
0
0
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
10~35°C, step: 1°C
20°C
3~10°C, step: 1°C
3°C
2~5°C, step: 1°C
5°C
0: No
1: Yes
0
0
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
0
0: No
1: Yes
0: No
1: Yes
0: Continuous
1: Sample
2: Request
(*1) *HB*_(*2) *HV*_
(*3) *3V_(*4) *9W_
(*5) *04/08*_
(*6) *11/16*
Installer setting at variance with
default value
Date
Value
4P383508-1B - 2017.04
4P384974-1B 2017.04
Copyright 2015 Daikin
Download PDF
Similar pages